E5ZN Users Manual
Cat. No. H113-E1-03B
E5ZN
Temperature Controller
OPERATION MANUAL
E5ZN Temperature Controller
Operation Manual
Revised November 2005
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2001
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Abbreviations
The following table lists the main abbreviations used in parameters, diagrams, and in the text itself.
Abbreviation
Meaning
PV
SP
Process value
Set point
AT
EU
Autotuning
Engineering units (See note.)
ch
Channel
Note Scaled data is expressed in °C, m, g, and other engineering units. EU is used
as the minimum unit for engineering units For example, the smallest unit of
50.02 (m) is 0.01 (m) and 0.01 is thus one EU.
Parameter Notation
The following table shows the alphabet notation used for parameter abbreviations and settings displayed on the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
vi
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
n
N
o
O
p
P
q
Q
r
R
s
S
t
T
u
U
U
V
w
W
x
X
y
Y
=
Z
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
3
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
SECTION 1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Name and Function of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
I/O Configuration and Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
SECTION 2
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
2-1
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
2-2
Using the I/O Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
2-3
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
SECTION 3
Temperature Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
3-1
Setting the Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
3-2
Selecting Centigrade/Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
3-3
Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
3-4
Setting Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
3-5
Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
3-6
Executing ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
3-7
Determining PID Constants: Autotuning and Manual Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
3-8
Alarm Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3-9
Using Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
3-10 Starting and Stopping Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
3-11 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
SECTION 4
Settings Used Only when Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
4-1
Shifting Input Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
4-2
Alarm Hysteresis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
4-3
Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (Analog Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
4-4
Executing Heating and Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
4-5
Using the Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
4-6
Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
4-7
SP Ramp Function: Limiting SP Change Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
4-8
Key Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
4-9
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
4-10 Reading Temperatures for Multiple E5ZN Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
4-11 Remote PV Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
4-12 Using Transfer Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
5-1
Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
5-2
Data Format Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
5-3
Structure of Command/Response Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
5-4
Variable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
5-5
Read from Variable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
5-6
Write to Variable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
5-7
Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
5-8
Setting Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
5-9
Commands and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
5-10 Variable Area Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
SECTION 6
Using the E5ZN-SDL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
6-2
Names of Parts on the Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
6-3
Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
6-4
Initial Setup Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
6-5
Using Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
6-6
List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
SECTION 7
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
7-1
Conventions Used in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
7-2
Protect Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
7-3
Operation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
7-4
Adjustment Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
7-5
Initial Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
7-7
Communications Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
viii
8-1
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
8-2
Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
8-3
Temperature Sensing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
8-4
Temperature Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
8-5
Output Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
8-6
HB Alarm Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
8-7
Key Operations Not Functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
8-8
Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
C
ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
ix
x
About this Manual:
This manual describes how to use the E5ZN and includes the sections described below.
Before using your E5ZN, thoroughly read and understand this manual in order to ensure correct use.
Also, store this manual in a safe place so that it can be accessed whenever necessary.
In this manual, current output models ([email protected]@-FLK) are referred to as “analog output models,” and voltage output models ([email protected]@-FLK) and transistor output models ([email protected]@-FLK) are referred to as “pulse output models.”
There are now pulse output models that support new functions. The new models are called “upgraded
pulse output models” when describing the functions added to these models. (Contact your OMRON
sales representative if you are not sure about the functions supported by your E5ZN Temperature Controller.)
The E5ZN Temperature Controller allows the user to perform the following:
• Control temperature for two channels with one Temperature Controller. The Temperature Controller
can be expanded to control up to 32 channels.
• Use an E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set the Temperature Controller.
• Input infrared temperature sensors, analog voltages, thermocouples, or platinum-resistance thermometers.
• Select heating/cooling control in addition to standard control.
• Select autotuning as the tuning function.
• Use multi-SP and a RUN/STOP function with event inputs.
• Use a HBA (heater burnout alarm).
• Use communications.
The E5ZN conforms to UL/CSA/IEC safety standards and EMC standards.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the E5ZN.
Section 1 describes E5ZN features, part names, and main functions.
Section 2 describes mounting, wiring, and other preparatory work that must be done before the E5ZN
can be used.
Section 3 describes the basic settings required by the E5ZN.
Section 4 describes scaling, SP ramp, and other functions to enable maximum use of the E5ZN functions.
Section 5 describes performing communications for the E5ZN.
Section 6 describes how to operate the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
Section 7 describes the parameters used to control E5ZN operation.
Section 8 classifies problems by situation and describes the methods for checking any possible malfunctions.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the Temperature Controller, or product failure. Please
read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in
the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations
given.
xi
xii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the E5ZN Temperature Controller.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Temperature
Controller. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate an Temperature Controller.
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
xiv
xiv
xiii
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing automation systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing automation systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing automation systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the Temperature Controller according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the Temperature Controller under conditions which are not
described in the manual or applying the Temperature Controller to nuclear
control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and
other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence
on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the Temperature Controller are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and
be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety
mechanisms.
This manual provides information for installing and operating OMRON Temperature Controllers. Be sure to read this manual before operation and keep
this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a Temperature Controller be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your
OMRON representative before applying a Temperature Controller to the
above mentioned applications.
3
Application Precautions
!WARNING Do not touch the terminals while the power is ON. Doing so may cause an
electric shock.
!WARNING It may be necessary to install a power supply breaker to turn OFF the power
supply before working on the Temperature Controller. Not turning OFF the
power supply may result in electrical shock.
!WARNING Do not allow metal fragments or lead wire scraps to fall inside this Temperature Controller. These may cause electric shock, fire, or malfunction.
!WARNING Do not use the Temperature Controller in flammable and explosive gas atmospheres. There is danger of explosion.
!WARNING Never disassemble, repair, or modify the Temperature Controller. Doing so
may cause electric shock, fire or malfunction.
!Caution Set all settings according to the control target of the Temperature Controller. If
the settings are not appropriate for the control target, the Temperature Controller may operate in an unexpected manner, resulting in damage to the Temperature Controller or resulting in accidents.
xiv
Application Precautions
3
!Caution Tighten the terminal screws properly. Tighten them to a torque of 0.40 to
0.56 N·m.
!WARNING To maintain safety in the event of a Temperature Controller malfunction,
always take appropriate safety measures, such as installing an alarm on a
separate line to prevent excessive temperature rise. If a malfunction prevents
proper control, a major accident may result.
Observe the following precautions when using the Temperature Controller.
• Use and store the Temperature Controller within the specified temperature and humidity ranges. If there is a possibility of the ambient temperature rising to a temperature above the specified temperature range, take
steps, such as installing fans, to cool the E5ZN. If the Temperature Controller is installed incorrectly, heat will build up inside, shortening the life of
the Temperature Controller. If heat buildup is a problem, use forced cooling, e.g., install a cooling fan.
• Do not touch the patterns or components on a board with your bare
hands. Hold it by the case.
• To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the Temperature
Controller. (Ensure that enough space is left for the heat to escape.) Do
not block the ventilation holes on the casing.
• Use the Temperature Controller within the specified power supply voltage
and rated load ranges.
• Wire properly using the correct terminal polarity.
• Use the specified size of solderless terminals for wiring (M3, width
5.8 mm or less).
• Use the specified wire sizes for wiring. Power supply terminals: AWG22 to
AWG14 (cross-sectional area of 0.326 to 2.081 mm2), Other terminals:
AWG28 to AWG16 (cross-sectional area of 0.081 to 1.309 mm2), Length
of exposed wire: 6 to 8 mm.
• Do not wire unused terminals.
• Make sure that the rated voltage is reached within 2 seconds after the
power supply is turned ON.
• Allow a warmup period of 30 minutes.
• Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or
other equipment that have an inductance component). When mounting a
noise filter on the power supply, be sure to first check the filter's voltage
and current capacity, and then mount the filter as close as possible to the
E5CN. Allow as much space as possible between the Temperature Controller and devices that generate powerful high-frequency noise (e.g.,
high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines) or surges.
• To reduce induction noise, separate the high-voltage or large-current
power lines from other lines, and avoid parallel or common wiring with the
power lines when you are wiring to the terminals. We recommend using
separating pipes, ducts, or shielded lines.
• Install a switch or circuit breaker in a location easily accessible to the
operator and label it appropriately.
• Do not use this Temperature Controller in the following places:
• Places subject to dust or corrosive gases (in particular, sulfide gas and
ammonia gas)
• Places subject to high humidity, condensation or freezing
• Places subject to direct sunlight
xv
3
Application Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
xvi
• Places subject to vibration and large shocks
• Places subject to splashing liquid or oily atmosphere
• Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment
• Places subject to intense temperature changes
Cleaning: Do not use paint thinner or the equivalent. Use standard grade
alcohol to clean the Temperature Controller.
Install DIN track vertically.
When mounting the Terminal Unit to the Temperature Controller, make
sure that the hooks on the Temperature Controller are inserted properly
into the Terminal Unit.
Remove the dust sticker from the Temperature Controller after completing
wiring to enable heat radiation.
When you draw out the internal mechanism from the housing, never
touch electric components inside or subject the internal mechanism to
shock.
SECTION 1
Outline
1-1
1-2
Name and Function of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 External Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Front Panel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-4 Setting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Configuration and Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
1
Section 1-1
Name and Function of Parts
1-1
1-1-1
Name and Function of Parts
External Appearance
• The E5ZN Temperature Controller can be mounted inside another device.
• RS-485 communications is a standard feature with the E5ZN, allowing
monitoring of PVs and reading/writing parameters from the host.
• The Terminal Unit and the Temperature Controller Module can be separated, making wiring and maintenance of the E5ZN easier.
• Space and wiring can be reduced by using an Expansion Terminal Unit
when connecting two or more E5ZN Controllers to the same host.
Basic Controller
Expansion Controller
Terminal Unit
Front Panel
E5ZN
Controller
Module
Front Panel Names
345
89
67
F01 2
1-1-2
CD
AB E
56
9 0 1
4
23
Unit number
switch
Baud rate
switch
78
Operation indicators
(LED)
2
Section 1-1
Name and Function of Parts
1-1-3
Display
Operation Display
1,2,3...
1. POWER
Lit when power is ON.
2. ERROR
Flashes when a memory error or an input error to either channel has occurred.
3. SD/RD (send data/receive data)
Flashes during communications with the host computer.
4. OUT1, OUT2 (control output 1, control output 2)
Lit when control output 1 or 2 is ON.
5. SUB1, SUB2 (auxiliary output 1, auxiliary output 2)
Lit when auxiliary outputs 1 or 2 is ON.
Note There is no display on the front panel for SUB3 and SUB4 (auxiliary output 3 and auxiliary output 4) of analog output models.
1-1-4
Setting Switches
Use the switches to change the communications conditions for communications with the host computer. Before using the E5ZN, match the settings to the
host.
Operate the switches under the following conditions only.
• The power supply must be turned OFF. The settings will be enabled only
when the power is turned ON again.
• To change the switch setting, use a flat-blade screwdriver and turn the
switch to the required position.
Unit Number
A unit number is set for each Temperature Controller to identify the Temperature Controllers connected to the host and to an E5ZN-SDL Setting Display
Unit.
The unit number is set in hexadecimal.
The switch settings are 0 to F, which correspond to unit numbers 00 to 15.
Setting
Unit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 A B C D E F
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
↑ Default
Set a different unit number for each Temperature Controller when more than
one E5ZN Temperature Controller is connected for RS-485 communications.
Communications cannot be performed if the same unit number is used more
than once in one system.
Baud Rate
Match the E5ZN Temperature Controller baud rate to the host baud rate.
Setting
Baud rate
(bit/s)
0
4800
1
2
3
9600 19200 38400
4
5
6
7
8
Do not use these settings.
9
↑ Default
3
Section 1-2
I/O Configuration and Main Functions
1-2
I/O Configuration and Main Functions
1-2-1
I/O Configuration
Analog Output Models
[email protected]@-FLK
Pulse Output Models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
Control ch1
Control ch 1
Controller
Temperature
input/ analog input
Heating
control output
Controller
Control output 1
Temperature
input/analog input
Cooling
control output
OR of Alarm 1
and Input Error
Aux. output 1
CT input
Heating
control output
Control output 1
Cooling
control output
Aux. output 1
Alarm 2
OR of Alarm 1
and HBA
Alarm 3
Alarm 2
SP transfer output
Alarm 3
Ramp SP
transfer output
PV transfer output
Control ch2
Temperature
input/ analog input
Heating
Control output
Cooling MV
transfer output
Control output 2
Control ch 2
Heating
control output
Cooling
Control output
CT input
Aux. output 3
Heating MV
transfer output
Aux. output 2
Temperature
input/ analog input
OR of Alarm 1
and HBA
Control output 2
Cooling
control output
OR of Alarm 1
and Input Error
Aux. output 2
Alarm 2
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 3
SP transfer output
Communications
Communications
Ramp SP
transfer output
PV transfer output
Event input
(one)
Event input
(one)
Aux. output 4
Heating MV
transfer output
Cooling MV
transfer output
Default
Note Refer to Output Allocations on page 26 for the combinations of functions that can be
allocated to the control and auxiliary outputs.
4
I/O Configuration and Main Functions
1-2-2
Section 1-2
Main Functions
Communications
Functions
Communications according to CompoWay/F (see note) are supported and are
performed through the RS-485 interface.
Up to 16 E5ZN Temperature Controllers can be operated from the host.
Note CompoWay/F is a general-purpose serial communications-based unified communications protocol developed by OMRON. CompoWay/F uses commands compatible with
the well-established FINS, together with a unified frame format on OMRON programmable Controllers to facilitate communications between personal computers and components.
Number of Control
Points
One E5ZN Temperature Controller has two channels for controlling temperature.
Input Sensor Types
The following input sensors can be connected for temperature input. Both
channels will use the same type of sensor.
Thermocouple:
K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B
Infrared temperature sensor type:
ES1A
K (10 to 70°C), K (60 to 120°C), K
(115 to 165°C), K (160 to 260°C)
Platinum-resistance thermometer:
Pt100, JPt100
Analog input:
0 to 50 mV
Control Output
The control output depends on the model as follows:
Voltage output models ([email protected]@-FLK): Pulse voltage output
Transistor output models ([email protected]@-FLK): Transistor output
(open collector)
Current output models ([email protected]@-FLK): Linear current output
Alarms
Control Adjustment
Event Input
HBA
• Set the alarm type and alarm value, or set upper- and lower-limit alarms.
• If necessary, a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by
setting the “standby sequence,” “alarm hysteresis,” and “close in alarm/
open in alarm” parameters.
Optimum PID constants can be set easily by autotuning.
• The following functions can be achieved using the event input (one input
per Temperature Controller): SP selection (multi-SP, 2 points max.) and
RUN/STOP.
• The event input is used by both temperature control channels.
A heater burnout alarm (HBA) is supported by pulse output models only.
5
SECTION 2
Preparations
2-1
2-2
2-3
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 External Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Assembling Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the I/O Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Terminal Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Precautions when Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Ensuring Prolonged Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Reducing the Influence of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Ensuring Precise Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4 Enclosure Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
8
8
13
13
13
14
19
19
19
19
20
7
Section 2-1
Installation
2-1
2-1-1
Installation
External Dimensions
UNIT
BPS
BPS
POWER
POWER
ERROR
ERROR
72.8
UNIT
SD/RD
OUT1
SD/RD
OUT1
OUT2
OUT2
SUB1
SUB1
SUB2
SUB2
4.7
30
27
35
46
5.2
22.5
4.7
E5ZN
E5ZN
27
35
46
130
130
72.8
(Unit: mm)
The following diagrams show the E5ZN with a Terminal Unit attached.
112
112
E5ZN-SCT24S-500 Terminal Unit
Note: Always use this basic E5ZN-SCT24S-500
Terminal Unit if using only one E5ZN Unit.
2-1-2
E5ZN-SCT18S-500 Terminal Unit
Note: Use the Expansion E5ZN-SCT18S-500
Terminal Unit for dense mounting with two or more
Units. Use this Terminal Unit for all but the first Unit.
Assembling Units
Joining Terminal Units
Together
Up to 15 Expansion E5ZN- SCT18S-500 Terminal Units can be connected to
a basic E5ZN-SCT24S-500 Terminal Unit.
Two Terminal Units can be connected by joining the side connector on each
Terminal Unit.
Side
connectors
8
Section 2-1
Installation
Attach a connector cover to the rightmost Terminal Unit.
Connector cover
Mounting to DIN Track
Mounting the Unit
Pull the hook down on the bottom, latch the top hook onto the track, push the
Unit until the hook locks onto the track, and then push the hook back up to
lock the Unit in place.
(2) Latch the top hook
onto the track
(3) Push the Unit into place.
(1) Lower the hook.
(4) Lock the Unit in place.
9
Section 2-1
Installation
Removing the Unit
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to pull down the hook and lift the Unit from the
bottom.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Mounting End Plates
Always mount end plates to both ends of the E5ZN Temperature Controllers.
up
up
For only one
Temperature Controller
10
up
up
For dense mounting of multiple
Temperature Controllers
Section 2-1
Installation
Mounting Bracket
Mount the E5ZN Temperature Controller to DIN track. Use screws to attach
the DIN track to the control panel in at least three places.
• PFP-50N (50 cm)/PFP-100N (100 cm) DIN Track
Horizontal: NG
Vertical: OK
Position the DIN track vertical to the ground.
Mounting the E5ZN
Module
Mounting the Module
Line up the Module with the guides on the Terminal Unit and push firmly into
place.
Line up with guides and push firmly until
the Module clicks into place.
IT
UN
S
BP
PO
ER
WER
RO
SD
R
/RD
OU
T1
OUT
SU
2
B1
SU
B2
Removing the Module
Push the hooks on both ends of the
Module and pull out the Module to
remove it.
IT
UN
S
BP
PO
ER
WER
R
RO
SD
/RD
OU
T1
OU
T2
B4
SU
SU
B2
11
Section 2-1
Installation
Covers
When wiring, open the E53-COV12 Terminal Cover attached to the E5ZNSCT24S-500 Terminal Unit or the E53-COV13 Terminal Cover attached to the
E5ZN-SCT18S-500 Terminal Unit. When wiring has been completed, close
the cover until it clicks shut.
Both E5ZN-SCT24S-500 Terminal Units and E5ZN-SCT18S-500 Terminal
Units have Terminal Covers.
Terminals
Covered
12
Terminals
Exposed
Section 2-2
Using the I/O Section
2-2
Using the I/O Section
2-2-1
Terminal Arrangement
Refer to the E5ZN-SCT18S-500 for the layout for terminals 1 to 18
+
19
Input power
supply
20
24VDC 21
B(+)
Setting Display Unit
Communications
A(-)
22
B(+)
23
Host communications
RS-485
24
A(-)
13
7
1
14
8
2
15
9
3
16
10
4
17
11
5
18
12
6
7
OUT1
14
SUB1
SUB2
15
COM
PNP (sourcing) type
[email protected]@[email protected]
16
CT1
CT2
ch2
ch1 17
18
Voltage-output type
[email protected]@-FLK
Transistor-output type
[email protected]@-FLK
2-2-2
13
13
SUB1 14
SUB2
15
COM
7
14
8
15
9
1
16
1-5VDC/
SUB3 0-5VDC
17 + 1-5VDC/
SUB4
0-5VDC
18 +
Analog-output type
(linear-voltage-output)
[email protected]@-FLK
7
Event input
2
NonContact contact
input input
3
OUT1
16
17
18
10
11
12
10
4
5
6
E5ZN-SCT18S-500
+
4-20mADC/
0-20mADC
-
11
+
12VDC
21mA
1
OUT2
+
12VDC
21mA
4
-
5
10
OUT2
10
-
5
12
6
ch1
ch2
Pt
4
-
11
V
+ 12
+ 6
ch1
ch2
Thermocouple/infrared
temperature sensor
2
8
ch1
ch2
Transistor-output type
[email protected]@-FLK
4
11
1
7
OUT1
8
2
ch1
ch2
Voltage-output type
[email protected]@-FLK
+
-
NPN (sinking) type
[email protected]@[email protected]
1
OUT2
8 2 ch1
ch2
Analog-output type
[email protected]@-FLK
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
13
+
4-20mADC/
0-20mADC
5
V
+ 12
ch1
+ 6
ch2
Analog input
Precautions when Wiring
• Separate signal leads and power lines in order to protect the E5ZN and its
lines from external noise.
• We recommend using solderless terminals when wiring the E5ZN.
• Tighten the terminal screws using a torque between 0.40 and 0.56 N·m.
• Use the following type of solderless terminals for M3 screws.
5.8 mm max.
5.8 mm max.
13
Section 2-2
Using the I/O Section
2-2-3
Wiring
The left sides of the terminal numbers in the following diagram are on the outside of the Unit and the right sides are on the inside of the Unit.
Power Supply
• Connect to terminals 19 and 20, as shown in the following diagram.
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
+
24-DC input
power supply
−
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
Inputs
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
19
20
• When reinforced insulation is required, connect the I/O to a device without
an exposed charged section or to a device with basic insulation suitable
for the maximum usage voltage of the I/O section.
• UL/CSA/CE Safety Standards
Use a SELV power supply with an overcurrent protection function.
A SELV power supply refers to a power supply with redundant I/O or with
increased insulation and with an output voltage of 30 Vr.m.s and a 42.4-V
peak or maximum 60 VDC.
Recommended power supply: S82K-05024 CD (OMRON) or S8VS06024A (OMRON)
• To ensure the rating of Main terminal disturbance voltage for class A in
EN61326, equip a noise filter (DENSEI-LAMBDA, MXB-1206-33 or equivalent one) to the DC power line as close to the temperature controller as
possible.
Connect channel 1 to terminals 10 to 12 and channel 2 to terminals 4 to 6 as
follows, according to the input type:
10
− 11
−
4
10
4
5
11
5
10
−
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT18S-500
14
+ 12
ch1
+
6
12
ch2
ch1
Thermocouple or infrared
temperature sensor
6
ch2
Pt
−
11
V
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
4
5
V
+ 12
ch1
+ 6
ch2
Analog input
Note Connect the terminals or set the parameter according to the following instructions to
prevent error indicators being lit for channels not being used.
• For upgraded pulse output models and analog output models:
With any type of sensor, the parameter “sensor error indicator used” (initial setting level) can
be used to prevent error indicators being lit for channels not being used.
• For the previous pulse output models (not upgraded):
• For thermocouple, infrared temperature sensor, or analog input:
Form a short-circuit between terminals 5 and 6 when channel 2 is not used, or between
terminals 11 and 12 when channel 1 is not used.
• For Pt:
Connect a resistance of 100 to 125 Ω between terminals 4 and 5 when channel 2 is not
used, or between terminals 10 and 11 when channel 1 is not used.
Form a short-circuit between terminals 5 and 6 when channel 2 is not used and between
terminals 11 and 12 when channel 1 is not used.
Section 2-2
Using the I/O Section
Control Output 1/2
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
• Terminals 7 and 8 are for control output 1 (OUT1) and terminals 1 and 2
are for control output 2 (OUT2).
+V
+
OUT1
-
+V
+
7
OUT2
8 GND
7
1
-
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3
E5ZN-SCT18S-500
Auxiliary Outputs 1/2
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3
8
Control output 2
Transistor output type
[email protected]@-FLK
+
4-20mADC/
0-20mADC
1
OUT2
-
2
+
4-20mADC/
0-20mADC
-
Control output 1 Control output 2
Analogue current output type
[email protected]@-FLK
• The following table shows the specifications for each output.
Output
Pulse voltage
Specifications
12 VDC output voltage ± 15% (PNP)
Max. load current 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
Transistor
Max. usage voltage 30 VDC, max. load current 100 mA.
Max. residual voltage 1.5 V, max. leakage current 0.4 mA
max.
Current output range:
4 to 20 mA DC
0 to 20 mA DC
Allowable load impedance: 350 Ω max. (See note.)
Current
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
OUT1
2
Control output 1
Pulse voltage output type
[email protected]@-FLK
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
7
OUT2
8
2 GND
Control output 1 Control output 2
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
1
OUT1
Note A G32A-EA Cycle Control Unit (made by OMRON; internal load impedance: 352 Ω)
can be used.
• The pulse voltage output (control output) is not electrically insulated from
the internal circuits.
When using grounded thermocouples, do not connect any of the control
output terminals to the ground. If the terminals are connected to ground,
unwanted current paths may result in incorrect temperature measurements.
• Terminals 13 and 15 are for auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) and terminals 14
and 15 are for auxiliary output 2 (SUB2.)
13
13
14
SUB1
SUB2
14
SUB1
SUB2
15
15
COM
PNP (sourcing) type
[email protected]@[email protected]
COM
NPN (sinking) type
[email protected]@[email protected]
• The transistor output specifications are given below.
Maximum applicable voltage: 30 VDC, maximum load current: 50 mA.
Maximum residual voltage: 1.5 V, maximum leakage current: 0.4 mA.
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT18S-500
15
Section 2-2
Using the I/O Section
CT Input
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3
• CT input can be used with pulse output models only.
• When the heater burnout alarm is used, connect a current transformer
(CT) across terminals 16 and 17 for channel 1 and terminals 16 and 18 for
channel 2 (no polarity).
16
CT1
CT2
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
ch1 17
ch2
18
• Use E54-CT1 or E54-CT3 Current Transformers.
E5ZN-SCT24S/18S-500
Linear Voltage Output
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3
• Linear voltage output is allocated to auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 and can be
used with analog output models only.
• Terminals 16 and 17 are for auxiliary output 3 (SUB3) and terminals 16
and 18 are for auxiliary output 4 (SUB4).
16 −
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
SUB3 DC1-5V/
DC0-5V
17 + DC1-5V/
SUB4
DC0-5V
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT24S/18S-500
18 +
• Do not apply voltage to the linear voltage output terminals.
Output
Specifications
Linear voltage output Voltage output range:
1 to 5 VDC
0 to 5 VDC
Allowable load impedance: 10 kΩ min.
• When event input is used, connect to terminals 3 and 9.
Event Input
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3
+
−
Contact input
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT24S/18S-500
16
3
9
Non-contact input
• Do not apply voltage to terminals 3 and 9.
• The inrush current that flows from E5ZN to the contact connected to terminals 3 and 9 is approx. 7 mA.
• Use event inputs under the following conditions:
Contact input
ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100kΩ min.
No-contact input
ON: residual voltage of 1.5 V max., OFF: leakage current of
0.1 mA max.
Section 2-2
Using the I/O Section
• When communicating with a host, connect across terminals 23 and 24.
Communications
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3
B(+)
23
A(−)
24
RS-485
• The RS-485 connection can be either one-to-one to one-to-N. Up to 16
Temperature Controllers can be connected in one-to-N systems.
• Keep the total cable length to 500 m maximum.
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
■ Isolation
The E5ZN terminals are electrically isolated in the blocks shown below.
Voltage output model
[email protected]@-FLK
G
F
A
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3 C
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
C
A
B
F
Transistor output model
[email protected]@-FLK
A
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3 C
G
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
22 16 10 4
23 17 11 5
24 18 12 6
C
A
B
A
B
E5ZN-SCT24S-500 E5ZN-SCT18S-500
F
19 13
20 14
21 15
E
D
7 1
8 2
9 3 C
F
E
D
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3 C
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
A
B
E5ZN-SCT24S-500 E5ZN-SCT18S-500
Current output model
[email protected]@-FLK
G
F
A
19 13 7 1
20 14 8 2
21 15 9 3 C
22 16
23 17
24 18
C
A
10 4
11 5
12 6
B
H
F
A
13 7 1
14 8 2
15 9 3 C
16 10 4
17 11 5
18 12 6
A
H
B
E5ZN-SCT24S-500 E5ZN-SCT18S-500
• Use shielded, twisted-pair cable (with wire sizes of AWG 28 or larger).
Cable
AWG 28 or larger
0.081 mm2 or larger
conductor cross-section
17
Section 2-2
Using the I/O Section
• Attach a terminator to both ends of the transmission path, including the
host.
• The terminator specifications are as follows:
Terminator
100 to 125 Ω (1/2 W)
• Use an RS-232C/RS-485 Converter when connecting personal computers with an RS-232C port.
Recommended Adapter: K32-23209 (OMRON)
Recommend Interface Converter: K3SC (OMRON)
(The K3SC is available in models with 100 VAC power supplies and models with 24 V, AC/DC power supplies. Specify the required type of power
supply when ordering.)
Adapter
K32-23209
RS-232C/RS-485
Converter
K3SC-10
RS-232C
D-Sub, 9-pin
(Straight, female-female)
Terminator
100 to 125 Ω
(1/2 W)
23 (B)
24 (A)
E5ZN
(No.0,1,2)
+ -
23 (B)
24 (A)
23 (B)
24 (A)
E5ZN
(No.3,4,5)
Terminator
100 to 125 Ω
(1/2 W)
E5ZN
(No.13,14,15)
• When using an E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit, connect across terminals
21 and 22. Refer to Section 6 Using the E5ZN-SDL for information on
how to use the Setting Display Unit.
Setting Display Unit
(E5ZN-SDL)
18
B(+)
23
21
A(−)
24
22
Section 2-3
Installation Precautions
2-3
2-3-1
Installation Precautions
Ensuring Prolonged Use
Use the Temperature Controller in the following operating environment:
Temperature: −10 to +55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Humidity: 25% to 85%
When the Temperature Controller is incorporated in a control panel, make
sure that the Controller's ambient temperature (not the panel's ambient temperature) does not exceed 55°C.
The life of electronic equipment like Temperature Controllers is influenced not
only by the life determined by the relay switching count but also by the life of
internal electronic components. The service life of components is dependent
on the ambient temperature: The higher the ambient temperature becomes,
the shorter the service life becomes, and vice versa. For this reason, the service life of the Temperature Controller can be extended by lowering its internal
temperature.
Mounting Temperature Controllers in any way other than the specified mounting method may cause heat to build up inside the Temperature Controllers,
which will shorten their service life. If there is a possibility of the ambient temperature rising to a temperature above the specified temperature range, take
steps, such as installing fans, to cool the E5ZN.
Be sure that the cooling method in not cooling just the terminal block. If only
the terminal block is cooled, measurement errors may occur.
2-3-2
Reducing the Influence of Noise
To reduce inductive noise, the leads on the Temperature Controller's terminal
block must be wired separately from high-voltage/high-current power lines.
Also, avoid wiring lines in parallel with or in the same wiring path as power
lines. Other methods, such as separating conduits and wiring ducts or using
shielded cables, are also effective.
Attach a surge absorber or noise filter to peripheral equipment that generates
noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, or other equipment that
has a magnetic coil or other inductance component).
When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Temperature Controller.
Also, install the Temperature Controller as far away as possible from equipment that generates strong, high frequencies (e.g., high-frequency welders or
high-frequency sewing machines) or surges.
2-3-3
Ensuring Precise Measurements
When the thermocouple leads are extended, be sure to use a compensating
lead wire matched to the type of thermocouple.
When the platinum resistance detector leads are extended, use a lead having
the smallest resistance to equalize the resistance of the three leads.
Mount to DIN track that has been installed vertical to the ground.
If there is a large error in the measurement values, make sure that input compensation has been set correctly.
19
Section 2-3
Installation Precautions
2-3-4
Enclosure Ratings
The enclosure ratings are shown in the following table. The E5ZN is not waterproof.
20
Temperature Controller
Module
IP00
Terminal Units
IP00
SECTION 3
Temperature Control Settings
This section describes the basic functions of the E5ZN.
3-1
Setting the Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Selecting Centigrade/Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Setting Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Control Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Direct (Cooling)/Reverse (Heating) Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Output Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Changing the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Executing ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 ON/OFF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Determining PID Constants: Autotuning and Manual Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-1 Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-2 Manual Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 Alarm Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 Alarm Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-2 Alarm Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Using Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-1 HBA Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-2 Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-3 Calculating the Detection Current Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Starting and Stopping Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10-1 Starting Control (RUN)/Stopping Control (STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
23
24
25
25
25
26
28
28
29
29
30
31
31
32
33
33
35
36
36
36
37
38
38
39
21
Section 3-1
Setting the Input Type
3-1
Setting the Input Type
Set the input type corresponding to the sensor used. The E5ZN specifications
support two types of inputs, platinum resistance thermometers and thermocouples. Refer to the following tables and set the correct value for the temperature range and the sensor used.
3-1-1
Input Type
To set the input type to a K thermocouple from −20.0 to 500.0°C, use host
communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set 1 as the set
value for the input type.
List of Input Types
Type
Input type
Name
Platinum resisPlatinum resisPt100
tance thermome- tance thermometer
ter input
JPt100
Type
Thermocouple
input
Input type
Name
Set Value
Input Temperature Setup Range
0
1
−200 to 850 °C or −300 to 1,500 °F
−199.9 to 500.0 °C or −199.9 to 900.0 °F
2
3
0.0 to 100.0 °C or 0.0 to 210.0 °F
−199.9 to 500.0 °C or −199.9 to 900.0 °F
4
0.0 to 100.0 °C or 0.0 to 210.0 °F
Set Value
Input Temperature Setup Range
K
0
1
−200 to 1,300 °C or −300 to 2,300 °F
−20.0 to 500.0 °C or 0.0 to 900.0 °F
J
2
3
−100 to 850 °C or −100 to 1500 °F
−20 to 400.0 °C or 0.0 to 750.0 °F
T
4
17
−200 to 400 °C or −300 to 700 °F
−199.9 to 400.0 °C or −199.9 to 700.0 °F
E
L
5
6
0 to 600 °C or 0 to 1,100 °F
−100 to 850 °C or −100 to 1,500 °F
U
7
18
−200 to 400 °C or −300 to 700 °F
−199.9 to 400.0 °C or −199.9 to 700.0 °F
N
R
8
9
−200 to 1,300 °C or −300 to 2,300 °F
0 to 1,700 °C or 0 to 3,000 °F
S
B
10
11
0 to 1,700 °C or 0 to 3,000 °F
100 to 1,800 °C or 300 to 3,200 °F
Infrared temperature sensor
ES1A
K10 to 70°C
K60 to 120°C
12
13
0 to 90 °C or 0 to 190 °F
0 to 120 °C or 0 to 240 °F
K115 to 165°C
(K160 to 260°C)
14
15
0 to 165 °C or 0 to 320 °F
0 to 260 °C or 0 to 500 °F
Analog input
0 to 50 mV
16
One of the following ranges depending on the
results of scaling:
−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9
Thermocouple
Note The ES1A for K160 to 260°C has been discontinued.
22
Section 3-2
Selecting Centigrade/Fahrenheit
3-2
Selecting Centigrade/Fahrenheit
Select either °C or °F as the temperature unit.
Refer to the following table and select the value that corresponds to the
desired temperature unit. The same temperature unit is used for both channel
1 and channel 2.
To use °C, use host communications and set 0 as the temperature unit or use
the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit and set c.
Unit
Setting
°C
0
°F
1
Default is 0.
23
Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control
3-3
Section 3-3
Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control
Either 2-PID control (PID control with two degrees of freedom) or ON/OFF
control can be selected. The control method is selected by using host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to change the “PID/OnOff”
parameter. Set the control method for channels 1 and 2 separately. Default is
for PID control.
2-PID Control
For PID control, the “proportional band (P),” “integral time (I),” and “derivative
time (D)” parameters must be set.
These PID constants can be set by autotuning or manual setup.
ON/OFF Control
In ON/OFF control, the control output is turned ON when the PV is lower than
the current SP, and the control output is turned OFF when the PV is higher
than the current SP (for reverse operation).
24
Section 3-4
Setting Output Specifications
3-4
3-4-1
Setting Output Specifications
Control Period
• Set the output period (control period). Though a shorter period provides
better control performance, we recommend setting the control period to
20 seconds or more when using a relay output for heater control (to
increase the effective life of the relay). If necessary, readjust the control
period according to the results of trial operation with the control period
parameters set to their defaults.
• Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set
the “heating control period” and “cooling control period” parameters.
Default is 2 s.
• The “cooling control period” parameter is used only in heating and cooling
control.
• Set the control periods for channels 1 and 2 separately.
3-4-2
Direct (Cooling)/Reverse (Heating) Operation
• Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable (MV) is
increased for an increase in the PV (e.g.,cooling). Alternatively, reverse
operation refers to control where the manipulated variable (MV) is
decreased for an increase in the PV (e.g., heating).
MV
MV
100%
100%
0%
0%
Low temperature
Set value
High temperature
Direct operation
Low temperature
Set value
High temperature
Reverse operation
• For example, when the PV (temperature) is lower than the SP (temperature) in a heating control system, the manipulated variable (MV) increases
by the difference between the PV and the set value.
Reverse operation is thus used in a heating control system and direct
operation is used in a cooling control system.
• Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set
“Direct/reverse operation” to “0: Reverse” or “1: Direct.” Default is for
reverse operation (heating).
• Set the direct/reverse operation for channels 1 and 2 separately.
25
Section 3-4
Setting Output Specifications
3-4-3
Output Allocations
• The E5ZN has four outputs. The following tables shows the default functions allocated to each output terminal.
Name
Set value
Function
Analog output models
[email protected]@-FLK
OUT1 (control
output 1)
Terminals 7 and 8
0
1
ch1
Heating control output
ch1
Cooling control output (See note.)
Heating control output
Cooling control output (See note.)
2
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
3
4
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Heating control output
ch2
Cooling control output (See note.)
Heating control output
Cooling control output (See note.)
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
8
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 2 output
9
10
Alarm 3 output
SP transfer output
Alarm 3 output
5
6
ch2
7
ch1
11
12
Ramp SP transfer output
PV transfer output
13
14
Heating MV transfer output
Cooling MV transfer output
15
16
ch2
PV transfer output
18
19
Heating MV transfer output
Cooling MV transfer output
0 to 19 (9)
5
SUB1 (auxiliary
output 1)
Terminals 13 and
15
0
1
Same as above.
ch2
Heating control output
ch1
Alarm 2 output
SP transfer output
Ramp SP transfer output
17
OUT2 (control
output 2)
Terminals 1 and 2
Same as above.
ch2
Heating control output
Heating control output
ch1
Cooling control output (See note.)
Heating control output
Cooling control output (See note.)
2
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
3
4
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Heating control output
ch2
Cooling control output (See note.)
Heating control output
Cooling control output (See note.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
5
6
ch2
7
8
SUB2 (auxiliary
output 2)
Terminals 14 and
15
Pulse output models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
9
0 to 9
7
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Same as above.
Alarm 3 output
Same as above.
ch2
ch2
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
Note When “Cooling control output for ch 1” has been set for an output, ch 1 performs heating/cooling control. When “Cooling control output for ch 2” has been allocated to the
output, ch 2 performs heating/cooling control.
26
Section 3-4
Setting Output Specifications
Name
Set value
Function
Analog output models
[email protected]@-FLK
SUB3 (auxiliary
output 3)
Terminals 16 and
17
0
ch1
1
2
Heating control output
Cooling control output (See note.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 2 output
3
4
5
ch2
Alarm 3 output
Heating control output
6
7
Cooling control output (See note.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
8
9
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
10
11
ch1
SP transfer output
Ramp SP transfer output
12
13
PV transfer output
Heating MV transfer output
14
15
Cooling MV transfer output
SP transfer output
ch2
16
17
Ramp SP transfer output
PV transfer output
18
SUB4 (auxiliary
output 4)
Terminals 16 and
18
Pulse output models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
Heating MV transfer output
19
0 to 19
17
Cooling MV transfer output
Same as above.
ch2
PV transfer output
Note When “Cooling control output for ch 1” has been set for an output, ch 1 performs heating/cooling control. When “Cooling control output for ch 2” has been allocated to the
output, ch 2 performs heating/cooling control.
• With analog output models ([email protected]@-FLK), if alarm output is allocated to OUT1 (control output 1), OUT2 (control output 2), SUB3 (auxiliary output 3), or SUB4 (auxiliary output 4), or if the control method is set
to ON/OFF control, the ON output will be 100% output and the OFF output will be 0% output.
Allocating Alarm 2
Output for ch 1 to SUB2
Auxiliary Output 2
Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set 3 as
the auxiliary output 2 allocation.
Allocating PV Transfer
Output for ch 2 to SUB3
Auxiliary Output 3
Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set 17 as
the auxiliary output 3 allocation.
27
Section 3-5
Setting the SP
3-5
3-5-1
Setting the SP
Changing the SP
Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set the SP.
Default is 0°C.
In this example, the SP will be changed from 0°C to 200°C.
• Use host communications to set the “SP” parameter to “000000C8H
(200°C).”
• To use the Setting Display Unit to change the SP, select the channel to be
changed and use the Up and Down Keys to set the SP to 200°C.
• To start control, an operation start (RUN) must be specified after changing
the SP. Refer to 3-10 Starting and Stopping Control for details.
28
Section 3-6
Executing ON/OFF Control
3-6
Executing ON/OFF Control
In ON/OFF control, the control output turns OFF when the PV (temperature)
reaches the preset SP. When the control output turns OFF, the temperature
begins to fall and the control output turns ON again. This operation is
repeated between certain points. How much the temperature must fall in relation to the SP before control output turns ON again is determined by the
“heating hysteresis” parameter. Also, whether the manipulated variable (MV)
must be increased or decreased in response in an increase or decrease in the
PV is determined by the “direct/reverse operation” parameter.
3-6-1
ON/OFF Control
Either 2-PID control or ON/OFF control can be set using the “PID/OnOff”
parameter. When this parameter is set to “PID,” 2-PID control is used, and
when set to “OnOff,” ON/OFF control is used. The default is “PID.”
Hysteresis
• In ON/OFF control, hysteresis is provided in the program when switching
between ON and OFF to stabilize operation. The hysteresis width provided during ON/OFF control is simply referred to as “hysteresis.” Heating
control output and cooling control output functions are set in the “heating
hysteresis” and “cooling hysteresis” parameters.
• In standard heating or cooling control, the hysteresis can only be set at
the “heating hysteresis” parameter.
• The default is 1.0.
Cooling hysteresis
Heating hysteresis
ON
ON
PV
OFF
OFF
PV
SP
SP
Heating Control
3-position Control
Cooling Control
In heating and cooling control, a dead band (an area where both control outputs are 0) can be set between the heating and cooling sides, enabling 3position control.
Dead band
Heating hysteresis
Cooling hysteresis
ON
Heating side
Cooling side
OFF
PV
SP
29
Executing ON/OFF Control
3-6-2
Section 3-6
Setup
To execute ON/OFF control, set the SP, the PID/OnOff parameter, and the
hysteresis.
Setting ch1 to ON/OFF
Control with an SP of
200°C and Hysteresis of
2°C
30
Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to make the
following settings.
• Set the PID/OnOff parameter for ch1 to “0: ON/OFF”
• Set the SP for ch1 to 200.
• Set the hysteresis for ch1 to 2.0.
Determining PID Constants: Autotuning and Manual Setup
3-7
3-7-1
Section 3-7
Determining PID Constants: Autotuning and Manual Setup
Autotuning
• When executing autotuning, the optimum PID constants for the SP during
program execution are automatically set by changing the manipulated
variable (MV) to calculate the characteristics of the control target. This is
called the limit cycle method.
• Autotuning cannot be executed while stopped or during manual mode or
ON/OFF control.
• To start autotuning, use host communications operation commands or the
E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit and set “AT execute/stop” to “execute.”
• To stop autotuning, use host communications operation commands or the
E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit and set “AT execute/stop” to “stop.”
• During execution of autotuning, only “communications writing,” “RUN/
STOP,” “AT execute/stop,” and “auto/manual” parameters can be
changed. No other settings can be changed.
• If “RUN/STOP” is set to “STOP” during execution of autotuning, autotuning and operation will stop. Autotuning will not start again even if “RUN/
STOP” is set to “RUN” again.
31
Determining PID Constants: Autotuning and Manual Setup
3-7-2
Section 3-7
Manual Setup
To set PID parameters manually, use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL
Setting Display Unit and set values for the “proportional band” (P), “integrated
time” (I) and “derivative time” (D) parameters.
When P is
decreased
When I (Integral Time) Is
Changed
When I is
increased
When I is
decreased
When D (Derivative
Time) Is Adjusted
When D is
increased
When D is
decreased
32
Set Value
Set Value
When P is
increased
Set Value
When P (Proportional
Band) Is Changed
Set Value
2.
When control characteristics are already known, the PID parameters can be set directly to adjust control. PID parameters are set in the “proportional band” (P), “integrated time” (I), and “derivative time” (D) parameters.
When PID constants I (integral time) and D (derivative time) are set to 0, control is
executed according to proportional operation. The default SP becomes the center
value of the proportional band.
Set Value
1.
Set Value
Note
The curve rises gradually, and
a long adjustment time is
required, but there is no overshooting.
Overshooting and hunting
occur, but the SP is quickly
reached after which the curve
stabilizes.
It takes a long time for the PV
to reach the SP. It takes time
to adjust, bit there is little
overshooting, undershooting,
and hunting.
Overshooting, undershooting,
and hunting occur, but the
curve rises quickly.
Overshooting, undershooting,
and adjustment time are
reduced, but fine hunting
occurs on changes in the
curve itself.
Overshooting and undershooting increase, and it
takes time for the PV to return
to the SP.
Section 3-8
Alarm Outputs
3-8
Alarm Outputs
This section describes the “alarm type,” “alarm value,” “upper limit alarm,” and
“lower limit alarm” parameters.
3-8-1
Alarm Type
Alarms 1 and 2
Set value
Alarm type
0
Alarm function OFF
1 (See
note 1.)
Upper and lower limit
2
Alarm output operation
When alarm value When alarm value
X is positive
X is negative
Output OFF
L H
ON
OFF
SP
Upper limit
X
ON
OFF
3
SP
Lower limit
L H
ON
OFF
Upper and lower limit alarm
with standby sequence
6 (See
note 6.)
Upper limit alarm with
standby sequence
SP
X
SP
Upper and lower limit range
5 (See
notes 1,
6.)
X
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
4 (See
note 1.)
See note 2.
ON
OFF
SP
See note 3.
SP
L H
ON
OFF
See note 4.
SP
See note 5.
7
Lower limit alarm with
standby sequence
8
X
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
9
0 0
Absolute-value lower limit
10 (See
note 6.)
11 (See
note 6.)
Absolute-value upper limit
with standby sequence
Absolute-value lower limit
with standby sequence
X
0
X
0
X
ON
OFF
0
0
X
X
0
0
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
SP
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
SP
X
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
1.
SP
Absolute-value upper limit
ON
OFF
Note
SP
X
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0
With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper and lower limits can be set independently for
each alarm point and are expressed as “L” and “H.”
33
Section 3-8
Alarm Outputs
2.
Operation for set value 1 (upper and lower limit alarms) would be as follows:
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
H < 0, L < 0
L
H SP
H < 0, L > 0
|H| < |L|
SPL
H
H
SP
H > 0, L < 0
|H| > |L|
H
L
H < 0, L > 0
|H| > |L|
L SP
H > 0, L < 0
|H| < |L|
SP H L
3.
Operation for set value 4 (upper and lower limit ranges) would be as follows:
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
H < 0, L < 0
L
H SP
H < 0, L > 0
SP L
H
H
SP
L
H > 0, L < 0
H < 0, L > 0
|H| > |L|
H L SP
SP H L
4.
5.
6.
H > 0, L < 0
|H| < |L|
Set value 5 (upper and lower limit alarms with standby sequence):
For upper and lower limit alarm cases in the above diagram, hysteresis is always
OFF for cases 1 and 2 if the upper and lower limits overlap. Hysteresis is always
OFF for case 3.
Set value 5 (upper and lower limit alarms with standby sequence):
Hysteresis is always OFF if the upper and lower limits overlap.
Refer to 4-2 Alarm Hysteresis for information on standby sequences.
Alarm 3
Set value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
When alarm value
X is positive
0
1
2
Alarm function OFF
upper and lower limit (deviation)
Output OFF
X X
ON
OFF
X
Lower limit (deviation)
5
6
7
34
Upper and lower limit range
(deviation)
Upper and lower limit alarm
with standby sequence (deviation)
Upper limit alarm with
standby sequence (deviation)
Lower limit alarm with
standby sequence (deviation)
SP
X
ON
OFF
SP
X
ON
OFF
4
Always ON.
SP
Upper limit (deviation)
ON
OFF
3
When alarm value
X is negative
X
SP
X X
ON
OFF
Always OFF.
Always OFF.
SP
X
ON
OFF
SP
X
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
SP
SP
X X
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SP
SP
X
ON
OFF
SP
Section 3-8
Alarm Outputs
Set value
8
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
When alarm value When alarm value
X is positive
X is negative
Absolute-value upper limit
X
ON
OFF
9
0 0
Absolute-value lower limit
11
Absolute-value upper limit
with standby sequence
Absolute-value lower limit
with standby sequence
0
ON
OFF
X
ON
OFF
0 0
0
0
X
ON
OFF
0
X
X
ON
OFF
0
X
X
ON
OFF
10
X
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0
Use host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit to set the
alarm type separately for each alarm for alarms 1 to 3. Defaults are “2: Upper
limit.” Set the alarms separately for each channel.
3-8-2
Alarm Values
Alarm values are indicated by “X” in the table in the above section. When the
upper and lower limits are set independently, “H” is displayed for upper limits,
and “L” is displayed for lower limits.
When upper and lower limit, upper and lower limit range, or upper and lower
limit alarm with standby sequence have been selected as the alarm type, set
the alarm upper limit and alarm lower limit parameters separately.
When other alarm types have been selected, set the alarm value parameter.
The upper and lower limits cannot be set independently for alarm 3.
35
Section 3-9
Using Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA)
3-9
3-9-1
Using Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA)
HBA Detection
To CT terminal
CT
Heater lead
Heater burnout detection works as follows:
1,2,3...
3-9-2
1. Pass the heater lead through the current transformer (CT) hole. For specifications, models, and external dimensions of current transformers that
can be used on this Controller, refer to Current Transformer (CT) in Appendix A.
2. When current flows through the lead, the current transformer generates AC
current proportional to the current value. The E5ZN measures this AC current to calculate the current flowing to the heater.
3. If the heater is burned out, the current measured at the current transformer
will decrease. If this value becomes larger than the value set as the heater
burnout set value, the output is turned ON to indicate a heater burnout
alarm.
• Set the heater burnout detection value in the “heater burnout detection”
parameter. To monitor the current value of the current transformer, use
the “heater current monitor” parameter.
• When you are not using the HBA function, set the “heater burnout”
parameter to “0: OFF.”
• Make separate heater burnout settings for ch1 and ch2.
Operating Conditions
• Be sure to connect the CT to the E5ZN, and pass the heater lead through
the CT hole.
• Turn ON the heater at the same time as or before turning the E5ZN. If the
heater is turned ON after turning the E5ZN, the heater burnout alarm will
activate.
• Control is continued even if the heater burnout alarm is turned ON. (That
is, the E5ZN attempts to control heaters for which the heater burnout
alarm has not occurred.)
• Heater burnout detection is performed when the control output is continuously ON for 190 ms or more.
• The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual current flowing to the heater. Check the current value in an actual operating
state in the “heater current monitor” parameter.
• If there is little difference between the current in a normal state and the
current in the burnout state, detection may be unstable. On a heater with
a current 10.0 A or less, maintain a difference of 1.0 A or more. On a
heater with a current 10.0 A or more, maintain a difference of 2.5 A or
more.
• The HBA function cannot be used when the heater is controlled by a
phase control system or cycle control system. Also, 3-phase heaters cannot be used.
Note To detect heater burnout for a 3-phase heater, use the [email protected]@[email protected] (with gate
input terminal). For details, see the data sheet.
36
Section 3-9
Using Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA)
3-9-3
Calculating the Detection Current Value
• Calculate the set value by the following equation:
Set value =
(Normal current + Current at heater burnout)
2
• To set the value of the heater burnout when two or more heaters are connected through the CT, use the current value of the smallest heater connected. If all the heaters have the same current value, use the current
value when one of the heaters burns out.
• Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied:
Heater of current 10.0 A or less:
Normal current − Current at heater burnout ≥ 1 A
(When the resultant current is less than 1 A, detection is unstable.)
Heater of current 10.0 A or more:
Normal current −
Current at heater burnout ≥ 2.5 A
(When the resultant current is less than 2.5 A, detection is unstable.)
• The setting range is 0.1 to 49.9 A. Heater burnout is not detected if the set
value is 0.0 or 50.0. If the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm is
turned OFF, and if the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm is turned
ON.
• Set the total current value at normal heater operation to 50 A or less.
Application Examples
Control output
Heater
Example 1
Using a 200 VAC, 1 kW Heater for OUT1
Current during normal operation =
1000
= 5 A (< 10 A)
200
Current at heater burnout = 0 A
5+0
= 2.5 A
2
(Normal current − Current at heater burnout) = 5 − 0 = 5 A (≥ 1 A)
Set value =
1 kW
200 VAC
CT
Example 2
Control output
Heater
1 kW × 3
CT
200 VAC
Using Three 200 VAC, 1 kW Heaters for OUT2
1000
× 3 = 15 A (≥ 10 A)
200
1000
× 2 = 10 A
Current at burnout of one heater =
200
15 + 10
Set value =
= 12.5 A
2
(Normal current − Current at heater burnout) = 15 − 10 = 5 A (≥ 2.5 A)
Current during normal operation =
37
Section 3-10
Starting and Stopping Control
3-10 Starting and Stopping Control
3-10-1 Starting Control (RUN)/Stopping Control (STOP)
Set the RUN/STOP operation command to RUN to start E5ZN control. To stop
control, set the RUN/STOP operation command to STOP.
There are three ways to set the RUN/STOP operation command.
1,2,3...
Operation after Turning
ON the Power Supply
1. Using host communications.
2. Using the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
3. Using an external contact for an event input.
• Set the operation status after the power supply for the E5ZN has been
turned ON. Choose one of the following two statuses.
Set value
Operation
Stop
Continue
Control will always stop when the power supply is turned ON.
Returns control to the status for the last time the power supply
was turned OFF.
• The following table gives additional information for each of the operation
settings.
Operation after
Additional information
power turned ON
Stop
When the power is turned ON, the RUN/STOP setting will
always be set to STOP and the E5ZN will start when the command is changed to RUN.
Continue
1.
2.
3.
If the E5ZN was in manual mode the last time the power was
turned OFF, it will be in manual mode when the power is
turned ON and the manual manipulated variable will be 0%.
When the setting for operation after the power is turned ON
is changed from “stop” to “continue,” the “RUN/STOP” operation command will be set to “STOP.” This setting change
will always be saved to internal non-volatile memory even if
the E5ZN is in RAM write mode.
When the E5ZN is used in RAM write mode, change the
“RUN/STOP” operation command from the host communications and then be sure to execute the RAM DATA SAVE
operation command. If the power is turned OFF before the
RAM DATA SAVE operation command is executed, the operation status will not be continued.
• Default is stop.
• This parameter setting is used by both channels.
38
Section 3-11
Operating Precautions
3-11 Operating Precautions
1,2,3...
1. About four seconds is required for outputs to turn ON after the power is
turned ON. Take this into consideration when the Temperature Controller
is incorporated into a sequence circuit.
2. The Temperature Controller may be subject to the influence of radio interference if used near a radio, TV, or wireless equipment.
39
SECTION 4
Settings Used Only when Required
4-1
Shifting Input Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Shifting Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Calculating Input Shift Values for Non-contact Sensors . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Alarm Hysteresis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Standby Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Alarm Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-3 Close in Alarm/Open in Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (Analog Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Executing Heating and Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Heating and Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Using the Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Setting the Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Using Control Start (RUN)/Control Stop (STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-3 Using the Multi-SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-1 SP Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 SP Ramp Function: Limiting SP Change Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-1 SP Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Key Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8-1 Key Protect Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9-1 Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9-2 Manual Manipulated Variable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Reading Temperatures for Multiple E5ZN Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10-1 PV Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Remote PV Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11-1 Using Remote PV Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Using Transfer Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12-1 Transfer Output Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12-2 Transfer Output Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
42
43
46
46
46
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
50
50
52
52
53
53
54
54
56
56
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
60
41
Section 4-1
Shifting Input Values
4-1
4-1-1
Shifting Input Values
Shifting Input
• The measurement value calculated by the sensor is normally the same as
the actual PV. An input shift can be applied if the measurement value
requires shifting.
• Two types of input shift can be used. A one-point shift is used to simply
shift the measurement value. For a two-point shift, the shift amount for the
lower limit and upper limit are set separately and both the measurement
values and the slope are shifted.
One-point Shift:
• With a one-point shift, the value set for the “Temperature input shift”
parameter is applied to the entire temperature input range. For example, if
the input shift value is set to 1.2°C and the measurement value is 200°C,
the PV will be stored as 201.2°C after the input shift has been applied.
Temperature
Upper limit
After shift
Before shift
Input shift value
Input
0
100% FS
• Default for both ch1 and ch2 is 0.
Two-point Shift:
• The shift amount and slope can be shifted by setting different shift values
for the upper and lower limits of the sensor range. Setting different shift
values means that the slope of the line will change. For example, if the
upper limit is set to “2°C” and the lower limit is set to “1°C,” the sensor
range is shifted by 1.5°C at a 50% input.
• Set the upper limit in the “upper limit temperature input shift value” parameter and the lower limit in the “lower limit temperature input shift value”
parameter.
• The default for the upper and lower limit temperature input shift values is
0 for both ch1 and ch2.
• A two-point shift is supported by the following models.
Upgraded pulse output models and analog output models:
Input type = Platinum-resistance thermometer, thermocouple,
infrared temperature sensor
Previous pulse output models:
Input type = Infrared temperature sensor
Temperature
Upper limit temperature input shift value
Upper limit
After shift
Before shift
Lower limit
0
42
Input
Lower limit temperature input
shift value
100% FS
Section 4-1
Shifting Input Values
4-1-2
Calculating Input Shift Values for Non-contact Sensors
When an ES1A Infrared Temperature Sensor is connected to the E5ZN, an
offset of several degrees to several tens of degrees can occur due to internal
impedance. Furthermore, if the rate of heat radiation of the control target is
not 0.9, errors may occur.
For this reason, offset the readout value using one-point or two-point shift as
described in this section. This offset occurs because a bias current for detecting Controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the infrared temperature sensor.
Preparations
1,2,3...
1. Set the temperature range matching the input specifications of the infrared
temperature sensor.
2. Prepare a thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the control target as shown in Figure 1 so that one-point shift or two-point shift can
be performed.
(D) Infrared temperature
sensor
(C) Control target
−
+
(B) Thermometer
(A) E5ZN
Figure 1 Configuration when Compensating a Infrared Temperature Sensor
One-point Shift
1,2,3...
1. In the configuration shown in Figure 1, bring the SP to near the value at
which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled. Let's assume that the control target temperature (C) and the control target temperature (B) are the same.
2. Check the control target temperature (B) and the Controller readout (A).
Take the following value as the input shift value, and set the same numerical values for both the lower limit temperature input shift value and the upper limit temperature input shift value.
Control target temperature (B) − Controller readout (A)
Figure 2 shows the effect of one-point temperature input shift.
43
Section 4-1
Shifting Input Values
3. After you have set the input shift values, check Controller readout (A) and
control target temperature (B). If they are almost the same, the temperature input shift value is correct.
Controller readout (A)
Upper limit temperature
After shift
Temperature readout
after shift (e.g., 120°C)
Input shift value (e.g., 10°C)
Temperature readout
before shift (e.g.,
Lower limit
temperature
input shift (e.g.,
10°C)
Before shift
0
Near SP (e.g.,
120°C)
Temperature readout of
control target (B)
Figure 2 One-point Temperature Input Shift
Two-point Shift
Use two-point input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout
values across the range of the sensor.
1,2,3...
1. The Controller readout will be shifted at two points, near room temperature
and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be
controlled. For this reason, bring the control target temperature to near
room temperature and to near the SP, and check the control target temperature (B) and Controller readout (A) at both points.
2. Using equations 1 and 2, calculate the upper and lower limit temperature
input shift values from values obtained in step 1.
Figure 3 shows the effect of using two-point temperature input shift.
Controller readout (A)
Set temperature upper
limit YH (e.g., 260°C)
After shift
Upper limit temperature
input shift value
Temperature readout
after input shift X2 (e.g., 110°C)
Before shift
Temperature readout
before input shift Y2 (e.g., 105°C)
Temperature readout
before input shift Y1 (e.g., 40°C)
Temperature readout
after input shift X1 (e.g., 25°C)
Lower limit temperature
input shift value
0
X1 room temperature
(e.g., 25°C)
Set temperature
lower limit YL
(e.g., 0°C)
Temperature
readout of control
target (B)
Near X2 SP (e.g.,
110°C)
Figure 3 Two-point Temperature Input Shift
• Use the following equation to calculate the lower limit temperature input
shift value.
Equation 1
YL − Y1
Y2 − Y1
× {(X2 − Y2) − (X1 − Y1)} + (X1 − Y1)
• Use the following equation to calculate the upper limit temperature input
shift value.
Equation 2
YH − Y1
× {(X2 − Y2) − (X1 − Y1)} + (X1 − Y1)
Y2 − Y1
3. After you have set the calculated values for the lower limit temperature input shift value and the upper limit temperature input shift value, check the
Controller readout (A) and control target temperature (B) at both points.
44
Section 4-1
Shifting Input Values
4. Although the input shift was performed at two points, close to room temperature (ambient temperature) and near to the SP, select points close to
each end of the sensor range to improve accuracy across the full range of
sensor measurement.
Example of Two-point
Temperature Input Shift
In this example, we use the ES1A K 160 to 260°C specification, where the
input temperature setting range is 0 to 260°C.
In equations 1 and 2, the set temperature lower limit YL is 0°C and the set
temperature upper limit YH is 260°C. Check the temperature of the control target.
We will assume that when the room temperature X1 is 25°C, the readout on
the Controller Y1 is 40°C, and when the temperature near the SP X2 is 110°C,
the readout on the Controller Y2 is 105°C.
Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Value
0 − 25
× {(110 − 105) − (25 − 40)} + (25 − 40) = −20.9 (°C)
110 − 25
Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Value
260 − 25
× {(110 − 105) − (25 − 40)} + (25 − 40) = 40.3 (°C)
110 − 25
45
Section 4-2
Alarm Hysteresis
4-2
Alarm Hysteresis
• The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON and OFF
can be set as follows:
Upper limit
alarm
Lower limit
alarm
Alarm hysteresis
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Alarm value
Alarm hysteresis
Alarm value
• Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the “alarm hysteresis 1” to “alarm hysteresis 3” parameters.
• Default is 0.2 for both ch1 and ch2.
4-2-1
Standby Sequence
• The standby sequence allows alarm outputs to be temporarily disabled
until the temperature leaves the alarm range (i.e., until an alarm condition
does not exist). Once the alarm range has been left, the alarm output will
then operate whenever the alarm range is entered.
• For example, in a standard heating application, if you use the standard
“low alarm,” the alarm output would be turned ON when the Controller is
turned ON. However, if the standby sequence is used, the alarm output is
disabled during the warmup period until the temperature goes above the
alarm SP. The alarm becomes active after the low alarm SP has been
exceeded and the output is turned ON if the temperature falls below the
alarm SP.
Restart
4-2-2
The standby sequence is ended when an alarm is output. It is, however,
restarted (reset) later by the conditions specified in the “standby sequence
restart” parameter.
Alarm Latch
• The alarm latch function holds the alarm output ON once it has been
turned ON regardless of the temperature.
• The alarm latch can be canceled by turning OFF the power.
• The alarm latch can be canceled by executing operation commands using
communications. This function is supported by upgraded pulse output
models and analog output models only.
• Default is “0: OFF.”
46
Section 4-2
Alarm Hysteresis
4-2-3
Close in Alarm/Open in Alarm
• When the E5ZN is set to “close in alarm,” the status of the alarm output
function is normally open. When set to “open in alarm,” the status of the
alarm output standby is normally closed.
• The close in alarm/open in alarm status can be set independently for each
alarm.
• The close in alarm/open in alarm settings are set in the “Alarm 1 to 3 open
in alarm” parameters.
• Default is “0: Close in alarm.”
• When “alarm 1 open in alarm” is set, the heater burnout alarm and input
error outputs are both open in alarm.
Setting
Close in
alarm
Open in
alarm
Alarm output function
Alarm output
ON
ON
Operation indicator
(LED)
Lit
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Lit
OFF
ON
Not lit
• The alarm output will turn OFF (open) for about four seconds when power
is interrupted or after the power is turned ON regardless of the close in
alarm/open in alarm setting.
Summary of Alarm
Operations
The figure below visually summarizes the above description of alarm operations when a lower limit alarm with standby sequence and close in alarm are
set.
Alarm type: Lower limit alarm with
standby sequence
Alarm value
Alarm hysteresis
PV
Time
Standby sequence
canceled
Alarm output function
Alarm output
ON
OFF
ON (closed)
OFF (open)
47
Section 4-3
Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (Analog Input)
4-3
4-3-1
Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits (Analog Input)
Analog Input
• An analog voltage input can be scaled matched to the control application.
• Scaling is set in the “scaling upper limit,” “scaling lower limit,” and “decimal point” parameters. These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input is selected.
• The “scaling upper limit” parameter sets the physical quantity to be
expressed by the upper limit of input, and the “scaling lower limit” parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower limit of input.
The “decimal point” parameter specifies the number of digits past the decimal point.
• The following figure shows a scaling example for an input of 0 to
50 mVDC for humidity. After scaling, the humidity(%) can be directly read.
Readout
(humidity)
Upper limit (95.0%)
Lower limit (10.0%)
Input (mV)
0
50
In this example, the scaling upper and lower limits are set so that inputs 0 to
50 mV are scaled to 10.0% to 95.0%.
Scaling upper limit: 950
Scaling lower limit: 100
Decimal point position: 1
48
Section 4-4
Executing Heating and Cooling Control
4-4
4-4-1
Executing Heating and Cooling Control
Heating and Cooling Control
Heating and cooling control operates when a cooling control output has been
allocated to one of the outputs. For example, to set heating and cooling control for ch1, allocate “cooling control output for ch1” to one of the outputs.
• When heating and cooling control is selected, the “dead band” and “cooling coefficient” parameters can be used.
• Refer to 3-4 Setting Output Specifications for allocation methods for heating and cooling control.
• The default allocation is “heating control output.”
Dead Band
The dead band is set with the SP as its center. The dead band width is set in
the “dead band” parameter in the adjustment level. Setting a negative value
produces an overlap band.
Dead band:
Dead band width = positive Output
Output
Heating
side
Cooling
side
Heating
side
PV
0
Overlap band:
Dead band width = negative
Cooling
side
PV
0
SP
SP
Default is “0.0 EU.”
Cooling Coefficient
If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target differ enough to
prevent satisfactory control characteristics from being obtained using the
same PID constants, control between the heating and cooling sides can be
balanced by adjusting the proportional band (P) at the cooling side control
output using the cooling coefficient. In heating and cooling control, P at the
heating or cooling control output sides is calculated using the following formula: Heating side P = P
Cooling side P = Heating side P × Cooling coefficient
The cooling coefficient is applied to heating side P to obtain cooling side output control whose characteristics (i.e., the cooling side P) differ from those on
the heating side control output.
Output
Output
Cooling side P
Heating side
P
Heating side
P
PV
0
0
SP
Heating Side P × 0.8
Cooling side
P
PV
SP
Heating side P × 1.5
49
Section 4-5
Using the Event Input
4-5
4-5-1
Using the Event Input
Setting the Event Input
The event input, which uses an external contact input, is set using the “No. of
multi-SP uses” and “event input assignment” settings.
The multi-SP function is allocated for event input by setting the “No. of multiSP uses” parameter. The RUN/STOP control function is set using the “event
input allocation” parameter.
When the event input is not used as a multi-SP function, the multi-SP function
can be used via host communications or the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit
by setting the “multi-SP use” parameter.
The following table shows the relationship between the three settings.
Event input use
Number of
Multi-SP uses
None
0
RUN/STOP
Multi-SP
Settings
Event input
allocation
None
Changing multi-SP via
communications or Setting
Display Unit
ON
Possible
RUN/STOP
OFF
ON
Not possible
Possible
OFF
Not possible
Not possible
Multi-SP use
1
The shaded areas indicate the default values for the “No. of multi-SP uses,”
“event input allocation,” and “multi-SP use” parameters.
The three communications parameters given in the left columns of the above
table are given priority in the following order: “No. of multi-SP uses,” “event
input allocation,” and “multi-SP use.”
4-5-2
Using Control Start (RUN)/Control Stop (STOP)
When the “No. of Multi-SP uses” parameter is set to 0 and the event input allocation is set to “RUN/STOP,” the RUN/STOP function can be controlled using
the event input. The following table shows the relationship between event
input contact status and control status.
Event input contact
Control status
ON (closed)
RUN
OFF (open)
4-5-3
STOP
Using the Multi-SP
The multi-SP function is used to switch between two SPs. Different SPs are
set in advance for SP 0 and SP 1 and the event input contact signals or E5ZNSDL Setting Display Unit is used to switch them.
Using the Event Input
The SPs listed in the following table can be selected by turning ON and OFF
the event input.
Event input contact
OFF (open)
ON (closed)
Note
1.
2.
50
SP
SP 0
SP 1
Switch event inputs while the power is ON.
ON/OFF is detected for inputs of 50 ms or more.
SPs for ch1 and ch2 are both switched at the same time using event input.
Section 4-5
Using the Event Input
Using Communications
The SP can be selected using the communications parameters shown in the
following table.
Multi-SP
0
1
SP
SP 0
SP 1
Note The SP can be switched independently for ch 1 and ch2.
Using Key Operations
The SP can be selected using the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
51
Section 4-6
Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Range
4-6
4-6-1
Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Range
SP Limits
The upper and lower SP limits can be set within the input temperature setting
range.
Once the input SP limit is set, the SP is automatically returned to the upper or
lower SP limit if it goes outside the SP limit range.
For example, If the SP upper limit is changed to 150°C when the SP is 200°C,
the SP upper limit was 300°C, and the SP lower limit is 100°C, the SP will
have gone outside the existing SP limit range of 100°C to 150°C. In this situation the SP will be changed to 150°C (i.e., the new upper limit).
If the input type or temperature unit is changed, the SP upper and lower limits
will be automatically reset to the upper and lower limits of the input temperature setting range.
Set the SP limit separately for ch1 and ch2.
Input temperature setting range
SP limit
Setting range
Changed to
the new upper
limit
A
B
×
Changed upper limit
(Setting not
allowed)
SP
Input temperature setting range
SP
Input type changed
SP
Upper and lower limits
Sensor upper and lower limits
52
C
B
(setting allowed)
Section 4-7
SP Ramp Function: Limiting SP Change Rate
4-7
4-7-1
SP Ramp Function: Limiting SP Change Rate
SP Ramp
The SP ramp function controls the rate of change of the SP. If a change larger
than the rate of change is specified when the SP ramp function has been
enable, changes in the SP will be limited as shown below. Thus, when
changes are made to the SP with the SP ramp function enabled, control is
performed according to the rate of change rather than the target value.
SP
SP ramp
SP after change
SP ramp set value
Time unit of SP ramp rate (min.)
SP before change
Time
Change point
The change rate during SP ramp is specified in the “SP ramp set value”
parameter. The “SP ramp set value” default is 0, i.e., the SP ramp function is
disabled.
The SP ramp can be monitored in the “SP during SP ramp” parameter.
Operation at Start
When the power is turned ON, operation is performed with the PV treated as
the SP before the change was made.
The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between
the PV and the SP, as shown in the following diagram.
PV < SP
PV > SP
SP
SP
SP ramp
SP ramp
PV
SP
Same change rate
SP
PV
Time
Power ON
Restrictions during SP
Ramp Operation
Time
Power ON
• Autotuning starts after the SP ramp function ends.
• When control is stopped or an error occurs, the SP ramp function is disabled.
53
Section 4-8
Key Protection
4-8
4-8-1
Key Protection
Key Protect Function
The protect function limits the settings that can be changed to prevent inadvertently changing settings.
There are three protect mechanisms: “Communications writing” prohibits setting changes from host communications, while “operation/adjustment protection” and “initial setting/communications protection” limit settings from the
E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
Communications
Writing
If the ‘communications writing” parameter is set to “0: Prohibited (off),”
changes to parameters other than “communications writing” are prohibited
from host communications.
Default is “1: Not prohibited (on).”
Operation/Adjustment
Protection
The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range
of protection.
0u
oapt
0
Level
Set value
0
Operation
level
1
2
3
PV
PV/SP
♦
♦
♦
Other
♦
♦
×
×
♦
×
×
×
Adjustment level
♦:
Can be displayed and changed
: Can be displayed
×: Cannot be displayed and moving to other levels not possible
• When this parameter is set to 0, parameters are not protected.
• Default is 0.
Initial Setting/
Communications
Protection
This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, communications setting level, and advanced function setting level.
0u
Set value
Initial setting level
icpt
0
Communications
setting level
Advanced function
setting level
0
×
1
2
×
×
: Moving to other levels possible
×: Moving to other levels not possible
Default is 0.
54
×
Section 4-8
Key Protection
Setting Change
Protection
This protect level protects the setup from being changed by operating the
keys on the front panel.
0u
wtpt
off
Set value
OFF
Description
Setup can be changed by key operation.
ON
Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The protect level can
be changed.)
Default is OFF.
55
Section 4-9
Manual Mode
4-9
4-9-1
Manual Mode
Auto/Manual
• If the “auto/manual” operation command is used by host communications
to set “01: manual (ch1)” or “11: manual (ch2),” the E5ZN will operate in
manual mode.
• If ON/OFF control is selected, operation cannot be switched to manual
mode. Always switch to PID control before selecting manual mode.
If manual mode has been selected and then operation is switched to ON/
OFF control, the mode will automatically be changed to automatic mode.
• In manual mode, the standard control functions are stopped and the values set in the manual manipulated variable will be output.
• Make separate settings for ch1 and ch2 for auto/manual switching.
• To switch from manual to automatic mode, use the “auto/manual” operation command to set “00: auto (ch1)” and “10: auto (ch2).”
• Switching between automatic and manual modes and manual manipulated variable settings cannot be made from the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
• To check whether the E5ZN is in automatic or manual mode, use host
communications to read the “status” parameter.
• Even if the “operation after power turned ON” setting is on “continue”
(continue operation status before power OFF), the manual manipulated
variable before the power was turned OFF will not be saved. It will always
change to 0%.
Output (100%)
100%
The output at switching
will be saved.
20%
Time
RUN (During
control)
56
To manual
mode,
using auto/
manual
switching
Sets manual
manipulated
variable to
20%.
To automatic
mode, using
auto/manual
switching
Section 4-9
Manual Mode
Relationship with RUN/
STOP
• The E5ZN can switch between auto and manual modes during both RUN
(control operating) and STOP (control stopped).
• Even if the manual manipulated variable is set to STOP during output in
manual mode, the operation status will not change and the output of the
manual manipulated variable will continue. (Refer to the following diagram.)
Output (100%)
100%
Changes to
STOP status.
Time
To manual
mode,
using auto/
manual
switching
4-9-2
To STOP,
with RUN/
STOP
setting
To automatic
mode, using
auto/manual
switching
Manual Manipulated Variable
Use host communications to set the manual manipulated variable to output in
manual mode.
The following table shows the relationship between the manual manipulated
variable setting range and the actual output.
Standard Control
Manual
manipulated
variable setting
100.0% to 105.0%
0.1% to 99.9%
−5.0% to 0.0%
Analog output models
[email protected]@-FLK
Pulse output models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
Heating side control output
Outputs the value set to man- 100.0%
ual manipulated variable.
Outputs the value set to manual manipulated variable.
Outputs 0.0%
Heating/Cooling Control
Manual
manipulated
variable
setting
100.0% to
105.0%
0.1% to 99.9%
0.0%
−0.1% to
−99.9%
−100.0% to
105.0%
Analog output models
[email protected]@-FLK
Pulse output models [email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
Heating side
Cooling side
Heating side
Cooling side
control output control output control output control output
Outputs the
Outputs 0.0%
Outputs 100% Outputs 0.0%
value set to
manual manipOutputs the
ulated variable.
value set to
manual manipulated variable.
Outputs 0.0%
Outputs 0.0%
Outputs the
value set to
manual manipulated variable.
Outputs the
value set to
manual manipulated variable.
Outputs 100%
57
Section 4-10
Reading Temperatures for Multiple E5ZN Units
4-10 Reading Temperatures for Multiple E5ZN Units
If the present temperature was read from multiple Temperature Controllers
using host communications, there are time differences in the process temperatures read from each Temperature Controller, making it difficult to obtain concurrent data.
The PV hold function can be used with the E5ZN to ensure that the data is
concurrent to within 500 ms.
To read present temperatures from all
Temperature Controllers, the PV is read in order
from Unit No. 1 to Unit No. 31. Time passes
between the execution of the first process
(reading from Unit No. 0) until the execution of the
thirty-second process (reading from Unit. No. 31.)
Host
computer
Unit No. 0
……
Unit No. 31
For this reason, there is a time difference
affecting the temperatures obtained from
Units 0 and 31.
4-10-1 PV Hold
• The PV hold function temporarily stores the present temperature for that
moment as the PV hold value, when the “PV hold” operation command
sent by host communications is received.
Host
computer
(3) “PV hold
value” read.
(1) “PV hold”
executed.
Unit No.
0
(1) “PV hold” is executed from the host computer.
(2) The present temperature for each E5ZN Unit
from Units No. 0 to 15 is written simultaneously to
PV hold values.
(3) The PV hold values are read in order, starting
with Unit No. 0.
Unit No.
15
(2) The present
temperature is held
• When using multiple E5ZN Units, use host communications to execute
the “PV hold” operation command simultaneously and then read the “PV
hold value” for each E5ZN. This enables highly concurrent temperature
logging.
• PV hold values are overwritten every time the “PV hold” operation command is executed. Once the PV hold values have been read for the channel that requires highly simultaneous reading of present temperatures,
execute the next “PV hold” operation command.
• The “PV hold” operation command cannot be executed and the “PV hold
value” cannot be read from the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
• When the power is turned OFF, the PV hold values change to 0.
58
Section 4-11
Remote PV Mode
4-11 Remote PV Mode
Remote PV mode forces PID equation output using the input value from the
external sensor with communications functions as the PV of the E5ZN,
instead of using normal thermocouple or platinum-resistance thermometer
sensor input.
This function is useful when using a remote external sensor with communications functions.
4-11-1 Using Remote PV Mode
1,2,3...
1. Connect the sensor input according to the following specifications.
• For TC, Infrared Temperature Sensors, or Analog Input
Short between terminal numbers 5 and 6 and 11 and 12.
• For Pt
Connect a resistance of 100 to 125 Ω between terminal numbers 4 and 5
and 10 and 11.
• Short between terminal numbers 5 and 6 and 11 and 12.
2. Set the cycle for communications data sent from the external sensor to “remote PV communications wait time.” This setting affects both channels.
If the refresh cycle for data from the external sensor is longer than the “remote PV communications wait time,” the E5ZN will determine that the external sensor has been disconnected, and an input error will occur.
3. To switch to remote PV mode, turn ON the “remote PV mode” parameter.
This parameter setting is used for both channels.
4. The PV from the external sensor is written to the remote PV.
5. To switch from remote PV mode to normal mode, turn OFF the “remote PV
mode” parameter.
Default Settings
The default settings are shown below.
• Remote PV mode:
OFF (normal mode)
• Remote PV communications wait time: 2,000 ms
59
Section 4-12
Using Transfer Output
4-12 Using Transfer Output
• Transfer output is supported by analog output models only.
• The E5ZN has two systems of transfer output: Linear current output is for
4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC, and linear voltage output is for 1 to
5 VDC/0 to 5 VDC.
4-12-1 Transfer Output Types
Ten types of data can be allocated for transfer output using the control output 1 allocation, control output 2 allocation, auxiliary output 3 allocation,
and auxiliary output 4 allocation (initial setting level):
SP transfer output for ch1
Ramp SP transfer output for ch1
PV transfer output for ch1
Heating MV transfer output for ch1
Cooling MV transfer output for ch1
SP transfer output for ch2
Ramp SP transfer output for ch2
PV transfer output for ch2
Heating MV transfer output for ch2
Cooling MV transfer output for ch2
• Control output 1 and control output 2 use linear current output, and auxiliary output 3 and auxiliary output 4 use linear voltage output.
4-12-2 Transfer Output Scaling
• The range set by the transfer output upper limit and transfer output lower
limit (initial setting level) can be scaled to the output range for the transfer
output (4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC for control output 1 and 2, and to
1 to 5 VDC or 0 to 5 VDC for auxiliary output 3 and 4).
• Values can be expanded by setting a small range between the transfer
output upper and lower limits. Reverse scaling can be performed by setting the transfer output upper limit to a value smaller than the transfer output lower limit. The following figure shows a scaling example where the
heating MV transfer output is scaled to 4 to 20 mA DC, and another
example where it is scaled to 1 to 5 VDC.
Transfer output
(mA)
Example of scaling
for 4 to 20 mA DC
Transfer output
(mA)
Enlarged scale
20
4
4
0
Transfer output
lower limit: 10
Example of scaling
for 1 to 5 VDC
Transfer output
(V)
100
Transfer output
upper limit: 80
Manipulated
variable (%)
Transfer output
lower limit: 100
Manipulated
Variable (%)
Reverse scaling
5
5
0
Transfer output
lower limit: 10
Transfer output
upper limit: 0
Transfer output
(V)
Enlarged scale
1
1
60
Reverse scaling
20
100
Transfer output
upper limit: 80
Manipulated
variable (%)
Transfer output
upper limit: 0
Transfer output
lower limit: 100
Manipulated
Variable (%)
Section 4-12
Using Transfer Output
Application Example
■ Example 1: Recording ch1 Input between 0 and 200°C Using a Recorder
Temperature Controller: [email protected] (current output, thermocouple input)
Recorder:
[email protected]
Sensor:
E52-CA15A D=3.2 NETU @M (K thermocouple,
sheath, protective tubing dia. 3.2 mm, protective
tubing length 150 mm, heat resistant)
Temperature Controller Settings:
Sensor input type (initial setting level):
0 (thermocouple, −200°C to 1,300°C)
Auxiliary output allocation 3 (initial setting level):
12 (ch1 PV transfer output)
SUB3 transfer output upper limit (initial setting level):
200.0 (°C)
SUB3 transfer output lower limit (initial setting level):
0 (°C)
Voltage output type (initial setting level):
0 (1 to 5 VDC)
Recorder Settings:
Input voltage and span settings (setting mode: Scaling)
SET
CH.No.
RANGE
ALARM
UNIT
CHART
CLOCK
COPY
AUX
01
02
03
MODE
MOD'
SKIP
VOLT
TC
RTD
DI
DELT
SCL
SQRT
04
RNG
VOLT
6V
Voltageinput
L
1.000
RANGE:
−6.000~
6.000V
SPANLEFT: 1V
R
5.000
SPANRIGHT: 5V
l
000.0
SCALELEFT: 0
r
200.0
SCALERIGHT: 200
Temperature Controller
[email protected]
Thermocouple
E52-CA15A D=3.2 NETU1M
UNIT
BPS
Recorder
[email protected]
POWER
ERROR
SD/RD
OUT1
OUT2
SUB1
SUB2
E5ZN
Channel 1 input
(Termocouple input)
Terminals 11 and 12
Aux. output 3
(Analog voltage output)
Terminals 16 and 17
+
Channel 1 input
+
−
−
Transfer output
1-5VDC
Transfer output
lower limit: 000.0˚C
0
10
20
Transfer output
upper limit: 200.0˚C
100.0˚C
30
40
SPAN-LEFT: 1.000 V
50
60
70
80
90
100
SPAN-RIGHT: 5.000 V
Recording of 1 to 5-VDC Output from
E5ZN Full-scale between 0 and 200˚C
■ Example 2: Displaying the ch2 PVs on an External Meter Using Transfer
Output
Temperature Controller: [email protected] (current output, platinumresistance thermometer input)
Meter:
K3MA-J 24 VAC/VDC (Process Meter)
Sensor:
E52-P20A D=3.2 @M (Pt100 platinum-resistance
thermometer, sheath, protective tubing dia. 3.2 mm,
protective tubing length 200 mm, general-purpose)
61
Section 4-12
Using Transfer Output
Temperature Controller Settings:
Sensor input type (initial setting level):
2 (platinum-resistance thermometer, 0.0°C to 100.0 °C)
Control output allocation 2 (initial setting level):
17 (PV transfer output for ch2)
OUT2 transfer output upper limit (initial setting level):
100.0 (°C)
OUT2 transfer output lower limit (initial setting level):
0 (°C)
Current output type (initial setting level):
0 (4 to 20 mA DC)
Meter Setting Example:
Inputs for 4 to 20 mA DC are scaled to 0.0 to 100.0°C.
Input type (initial setting level: in-t):
4 to 20 mA DC (4-20)
Scaling input value 1 (initial setting level: inp.1): 4 mA (4.00)
Scaling display value 1 (initial setting level: dsp.1):0 (00000)
Scaling input value 2 (initial setting level: inp.2): 20 mA (20.00)
Scaling display value 2 (initial setting level: dsp.2):100 (01000)
Decimal point (initial setting level: dp): One decimal place (0000.0)
Process Meter
K3MA-J AC/DC24V
Temperature Controller
[email protected]@-FLK
Transfer output
4 to 20 mA DC
Analog Input (E5) −
Analog Input (E6) +
OUT2
(analog current output)
Terminals 1 and 2
MAX/MIN
LEVEL
MODE
SHIFT
UNIT
Thermocouple
BPS
POWER
ERROR
E52-P20A D=3.2 @M
SD/RD
OUT1
OUT2
SUB1
SUB2
E5ZN
Channel 2 input
(Thermocouple input)
Terminals 4, 5, and 6
62
B (White/black)
A (Red)
B (Black/white)
UP
SECTION 5
Communications
5-1
Communication Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 CompoWay/F Communication Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Communications Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Data Format Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Command Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Response Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Structure of Command/Response Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Variable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Read from Variable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Write to Variable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Operation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Setting Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Commands and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-1 Read Monitor Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-2 Read Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-3 Multiple Reads of Monitor Values/Setting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-4 Write Protect Level Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-5 Write Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-6 Multiple Writes of Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-7 Communications Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-8 Control Start (RUN)/Control Stop (STOP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-9 Multi-SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-10 AT Execute/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-11 Write Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-12 RAM Data Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-13 Software Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-14 Move to Setting Area 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-15 Move to Protect Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-16 Auto/Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-17 PV Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-18 Parameter Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-19 Alarm Latch Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-20 Read Controller Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-21 Read Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9-22 Echoback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Variable Area Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
64
64
64
65
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
73
74
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
80
81
81
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
88
89
90
63
Section 5-1
Communication Protocols
5-1
5-1-1
Communication Protocols
CompoWay/F Communication Protocol
CompoWay/F is a standard OMRON communications protocol for generalpurpose serial communications. It uses a standard frame format as well as
FINS commands that have been proven in data exchange between OMRON's
Programmable Controllers (PCs). The CompoWay/F format facilitates serial
communications between components or a PC and components.
FINS (Factory Interface Network Service)
FINS is a protocol for message communications between Controllers in
OMRON FA networks.
Note The program for communications is created on the host PC and E5ZN's parameters
are monitored or set from the host PC. In this manual, descriptions of communications
are given from the standpoint of the host PC.
5-1-2
Communications Specification
Transmission line connection:
Communications method:
Synchronization method:
Baud rate:
Communications code:
Word length:
Stop bit length:
Parity check:
Flow control:
Interface:
Retry function:
Multipoint
RS-485 (Two-wire, half-duplex)
Start-stop synchronization
4.8 k, 9.6 k, 19.2 k, or 38.4 k bit/s
ASCII
7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits
Vertical parity - None, Odd, or Even
BCC (block check character)
Start-stop synchronization data composition
None
RS-485
None
Note Default settings are underlined.
5-1-3
Communications Procedure
Communications between the Temperature Controller and the host PC are
implemented on a frame-by-frame basis.
When the host PC sends a command frame to the Temperature Controller, the
Temperature Controller returns to the host PC a response frame that corresponds to the command frame.
Command and response frames are transmitted as follows:
and
and
Re
framsponse
e
m
Com e
fram
m
Co m e
fram
Re
framsponse
e
Host PC
Temperature Controller
Allow a minimum wait time of 5 ms from when the host PC receives the response from the Temperature Controller until the host sends the next command.
Note Errors may occur in communications data due to ambient noise. To increase the reliability of the system, OMRON recommends executing retry processing to resend the
command when an error response frame is detected.
64
Section 5-2
Data Format Structure
5-2
Data Format Structure
Communications conforming to the CompoWay/F serial communications protocol involve transmission of blocks of data called frames. Those sent from
the host PC are command frames and those sent from the Temperature Controller are response frames. The structure of these frames is shown below.
In the following frame description, the suffix H added to a numeric value, as in
02H, means the value is a hexadecimal number. And quotation marks around
an alphanumeric value, as in “00,” mean that the value is an ASCII character
set. The number underneath each delimiter in a frame indicates the number of
bytes.
5-2-1
Command Frame
FINS-mini
command text
STX
Node No. Subaddress
SID
02H
“00”
“0”
03H
2
1
1
1
2
ETX BCC
1 byte
BCC calculation range
STX
Code indicating the start of a command frame (02H). Be sure to
place this code in the first byte of a command frame.
Node No.
Node ID specifying the destination of a command frame. Set this
No. to the unit number of the Temperature Controller.
If you want to broadcast a command, set the node number to
“XX.” No response is given from the Temperature Controllers for
broadcast commands.
Sub-address
SID (Service ID)
Not used for E5ZN. Always set the sub-address to “00.”
Not used for E5ZN. Always set the SID to “0.”
FINS-mini
command text
ETX
Command text
BCC
Block Check Character
The result of a block check on the BCC calculation range is
stored in this field.
STX Node No.
Code indicating the end of text (03H)
Subaddress
SID
FINS-mini
command text
ETX BCC
02H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 35H 30H 30H 03H 36H
BCC = 30H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 35H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 30H ⊕ 03H = 36H
⊕: XOR (exclusive OR) operation
Note How to Determine the BCC:
The BCC is determined by XOR operation on a byte-by-byte basis of the values within
the range from the node number field to the ETX field. The result (36H in the example
shown above) is placed in the BCC field.
65
Section 5-2
Data Format Structure
5-2-2
Response Frame
STX Node No.
02H
Subaddress
End code
FINS-mini
response text
“00”
1
2
2
ETX BCC
03H
2
1
1 byte
Note The Temperature Controller will not respond to any command frame that does not end
in the ETX and BCC.
STX
Code indicating the start of a response frame (02H).
Be sure to place this code in the first byte of the response frame.
Node No.
The node number is set to the value that was specified in the corresponding command frame.
The unit number of the Temperature Controller that returns the
response is set in this field.
Not used for E5ZN. This field is always set to “00.”
Sub-address
End code
This field contains the result of execution of the corresponding
command frame.
FINS-mini
response text
ETX
Response text
BCC
Block Check Character
The result of a block check on the BCC calculation range is stored
in this field.
Code indicating the end of text (03H)
End Code
End
code
66
Code name
Description
Error
detection
priority
“0F”
FINS command error
The specified FINS command could
not executed.
8
“10”
Parity error
2
“11”
Framing error
“12”
Overrun error
“13”
BCC error
“14”
Format error
The sum of the bits (received data (1))
does not match.
The number of character stop bits for
the command frame was 0.
A data transfer was attempted when
the reception data buffer was already
full.
The received BCC was different from
the calculated BCC
The command text contains characters other than “0” to “9” and “A” to “F.”
No SID and command text.
MRC and SRC in the command text
were not included in the command
text.
“16”
Sub-address error
No sub-address, SID, and command
text.This error is not covered by the
echoback test.
The size of the sub-address was less
than two characters, and no SID and
command text were found.
6
“18”
Frame length error
The size of the received frame
exceeded the specified number of
bytes.
4
“00”
Normal completion
The command was successfully executed.
None
1
3
5
7
Section 5-3
Structure of Command/Response Text
5-3
Structure of Command/Response Text
The command/response text constitutes the main body of a command/
response frame. The structure of the command/response text is described
below.
Command Text
The command text consists of the MRC (Main Request Code) and the SRC
(Sub Request Code), followed by the required data.
Node
STX No.
02H
Response Text
FINS-mini
command text
Subaddress SID
“00”
MRC
SRC
2
2 bytes
“0”
ETX BCC
03H
Data
The response text consists of the MRC and SRC, followed by the MRES
(Main Response Code), the SRES (Sub Response Code), and the required
data.
Node
STX No.
SubEnd
address code
02H
FINS-mini
response text
“00”
MRC
2
SRC
2
ETXBCC
03H
MRES SRES
2
Data
2 bytes
If the Temperature Controller fails to execute a specified command, it generates a response consisting of the MRC, SRC, MRES, and SRES only.
List of Services
Service name
Description
“01”
MRC
“01”
SRC
Read from Variable Area
“01”
“02”
Write to Variable Area
This service reads from the variable
area.
This service writes to the variable area.
“01”
“04”
Read from Multiple Variable Area
This service performs non-consecutive
multiple reads from the variable area.
“01”
“13”
Write to Multiple Variable This service performs non-consecutive
Area
multiple writes to the variable area.
“05”
“03”
Read Controller Attribute
“06”
“01”
Read Controller Status
“08”
“01”
Echoback Test
“30”
“05”
Operation Commands
This service reads the model number
and the communications buffer size.
This service reads the run status of the
Controller.
This service performs the echoback
test.
This service performs RUN/STOP, AT
Execute/Cancel, Move for Setting Area
1, etc.
67
Section 5-4
Variable Area
5-4
Variable Area
The section of memory in the Temperature Controller that holds the data to be
transmitted via communications is called the variable area. The variable area
is to read current PVs or read/write parameter settings.
The variable area is not used for operation commands or for reading Controller attributes.
E5ZN
Op
era
ti o
n
m
co
ma
nd
Microcomputer
Variable area
Data reading/writing
To specify the position of a variable in the variable area, use the variable type
and address.
Address
0000 0001 0002 0003
013D 013E 013F
Variable type C0
C1
C3
C5
C7
Variable
C0 ch1 PV etc.
C1 ch1 SP etc.
C3
ch1 input
type etc.
C5 ch1 remote
PV
C7 ch1 remote
PV mode
Variable type C0:
Variable type C1:
Variable type C3:
Variable type C5:
Variable type C7:
68
Not used
ch2 PV etc.
Not used
ch2 SP etc.
Not used
ch2 input
type etc.
Not used
Not used
01
3
01 E
3F
01
1
01 9
1A
01
0
01 6
07
01
0
01 0
0101
0
01 2
03
00
3
00 E
3F
00
1
00 9
1A
00
0
00 6
07
00
0000
0
00 1
0
00 2
03
The address is a 4-digit hexadecimal code. Each variable contains an eightdigit value in hexadecimal. Negative values are expressed as the two's complement. When the current value of a variable is read as 105.0 on the main
indicator of the Temperature Controller, for example, its hexadecimal notation
is read in the form 0000041AH (the decimal point is ignored; 105.0 → 1050 →
0000041AH).
The variable area is mapped as shown below. The variable type is converted
to a 2-byte ASCII code and loaded to the frame. Available variable types are
shown in the following map.
Not used
Not used
ch2 remote
PV
Not used
ch2 remote
PV mode
Not used
Read-only data for settings area 0 in double-word format
Read/write data for settings area 0 in double-word format
Read/write data for settings area 1 in double-word format
Read/write data for settings area 0 in double-word format
Read/write data for settings area 1 in double-word format
Section 5-5
Read from Variable Area
5-5
Read from Variable Area
This service reads data from the variable area.
Command
Command Text
MRC
SRC
“01”
“01”
2
2
Variable Read start
type
address
Bit
No. of
position elements
“00”
Command Text
Response
2
4
2
4 bytes
Item
MRC/SRC
Description
Specify the FINS-mini command for reading a variable area.
Variable type
Read start address
Set this item to “C0,” “C1,” “C3,” “C5,” or “C7.”
Specify the read start address.
Bit position
No. of elements
Not used for E5ZN. Always set this item to “00.”
Set this item to the quantity of variables that are to be read (up
to 6). Not required for multiple reads.
Response Text
MRC
“01”
2
Response code
SRC (MRES/SRES)
“01”
2
Readout data
No. or elements × 8 bytes (No. of
elements × 10 bytes for multiple reads)
4
Item
Description
MRC/SRC
Response code
This field returns the FINS-mini command text.
This field contains the execution result of the command.
Readout data
This field returns the values of the variables that have been
read out.
Response Codes
Response
code
Code name
Description
“1001”
“1002”
Command length over
Command length short
The command is too long.
The command is too short.
“1101”
“110B”
Area type error
Response length over
The specified variable type is invalid.
The number of elements exceeds 6.
“1100”
Parameter error
The bit position is set to a value other than
“00.”
“2203”
“0000”
Operation error
Normal completion
EEPROM error
The command was successfully executed.
69
Section 5-6
Write to Variable Area
5-6
Write to Variable Area
This service writes data to the variable area.
Command
Command Text
MRC
SRC
“01”
“02”
2
Variable Write start
type
address
2
2
Bit
No. of
position elements
“00”
4
Item
Response
2
4 bytes
Writing data
(No. of elements × 8) bytes
Description
MRC/SRC
Area type
Specify the FINS-mini command for writing to a variable area.
Set this item to “C1,” “C3,” “C5,” or “C7.”
Write start address
Bit position
Specify the write start address at this field.
Not used for E5ZN. Always set this item to “00.”
No. of elements
Set this item to the quantity of variables that are to be written
(up to 6). Not required for multiple writes.
Data to be written
Place the desired data in this field.
Response Text
MRC
“01”
2
Response code
SRC (MRES/SRES)
“02”
2
4
Item
MRC/SRC
Description
This field contains the same value (“01”/“02”) as specified in
the command text.
This field contains the result of execution of the command.
Response code
Response Codes
Response
code
70
Code name
Description
“1002”
“1101”
Command length short
Area type error
The command is too short.
The specified variable type is invalid.
“1003”
Data quantity mismatch
error
A mismatch between the number of elements and the quantity of variables occurs.
“1100”
Parameter error
“3003”
Read only error
“2203”
Operation error
The bit position is set to a value other than
“00.”
The value of data to be written is outside the
valid range.
An attempt is made to write data to an
address of variable type C0.
Communications writing is disabled.
An attempt is made to write data from setting
area 0 to setting area 1.
An attempt is made to write setting data at a
level other than protect level.
Executing AT.
An error occurs in EEPROM.
“0000”
Normal completion
The command was successfully executed.
Section 5-7
Operation Commands
5-7
Operation Commands
To send an operation command to the Temperature Controller, set the items in
the command text as follows:
Command
Command Text
MRC
SRC
“30”
“05”
2
Command Related
code
information
2
2
2 bytes
Item
MRC/SRC
Description
Specify the FINS-mini operation command (operation command service).
Place a command code in this field.
Command code
Related information
Place information related to the operation command in this
field.
E5ZN Command Codes
Command
code
Command code
Related information
“00”
Communications
writing
“00” or “10”: OFF (disable)
“01” or “11”: ON (enable)
“01”
RUN/STOP
“00”: Run ch1
“01”: Stop ch1
“10”: Run ch2
“11”: Stop ch2
“F0”: Run ch1, ch2 (See note 1.)
”F1”: Stop ch1, ch2 (See note 1.)
“02”
Multi-SP
“00”: Select SP0 for ch1
“01”: Select SP1 for ch1
“10”: Select SP0 for ch2
“11”: Select SP1 for ch2
“F0”: Select SP0 for ch1, ch2 (See note 1.)
“F1”: Select SP1 for ch1, ch2 (See note 1.)
“03”
AT execute/cancel
“00”: Stop ch1 AT
“01”: Execute ch1 AT
“10”: Stop ch2 AT
“11”: Execute ch2 AT
“F0”: Stop ch1, ch2 AT (See note 1.)
“F1”: Execute ch1, ch2 AT (See note 1.)
“04”
Write mode
“00” or “10”: Backup
“01” or “11”: RAM
“05”
“06”
RAM data save
Software reset
“00” or “10”
”00” or “10”
“07”
“08”
Move to setting area 1 ”00” or “10”
Move to protect level
”00” or “10”
“09”
Auto/manual
“00”: Auto for ch1
“01”: Manual for ch1
“10”: Auto for ch2
“11”: Manual for ch2
“F0”: Auto for ch1, ch2 (See note 1.)
“F1”: Manual for ch1, ch2 (See note 1.)
71
Section 5-7
Operation Commands
Command
Command code
code
“0A”
PV hold
“00” or “10”
“0B”
“0C”
“00” or “10”
“00”: Cancel alarm latch 1 for ch1 (See note 1.)
Parameter initialize
Alarm latch cancel
Related information
“01”: Cancel alarm latch 2 for ch1 (See note 1.)
“02”: Cancel alarm latch 3 for ch1
“0F”: Cancel all alarm latches for ch1
(See note 1.)
“10”: Cancel alarm latch 1 for ch2 (See note 1.)
“11”: Cancel alarm latch 2 for ch2 (See note 1.)
“12”: Cancel alarm latch 3 for ch2 (See note 1.)
“1F”: Cancel all alarm latches for ch2
(See note 1.)
“F0”: Cancel alarm latch 1 for ch1, ch2
(See note 1.)
“F1”: Cancel alarm latch 2 for ch1, ch2
(See note 1.)
“F2”: Cancel alarm latch 3 for ch1, ch2
(See note 1.)
“FF”: Cancel all alarm latches for ch1, ch2
(See note 1.)
Note
1.
2.
Response
These commands are supported by upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only.
Command codes for which the related information is indicated as “00” or “10,” or
“01” or “11” use the same command for both ch1 and ch2. Either value in the related information can be used. (The result will be the same.)
Response Text
MRC
“30”
2
Response code
SRC (MRES/SRES)
“05”
2
4 bytes
Item
MRC/SRC
Description
This field contains the same value (“30”/“05”) as specified in
the command text.
This field contains the execution result of the command.
Response code
Response Codes
Response
code
72
Code name
Description
“1001”
“1002”
Command length over
Command length short
The command is too long.
The command is too short.
“1100”
Parameter error
The command code or related information is
invalid.
“2203”
Operation error
“0000”
Normal completion
Communications writing is disabled.
The specified operation cannot be executed.
For details, refer to 5-9 Commands and
Responses.
An error occurs in EEPROM.
The command was successfully executed.
Section 5-8
Setting Areas
5-8
Setting Areas
E5ZN Temperature Controllers can be set to either setting area 0 or setting
area 1.
Control operation is executed in setting area 0. In this state, you can perform
operations that are permitted only during control or those that cause no problems even if control is in progress. These operations include reading PVs,
writing SPs, and change RUN/STOP status.
Setting area 0, however, prohibits operations affect control, including writing
data at the initial setting level. (Reading setting data is always allowed.)
In setting area 1, control operation is stopped. In this state, you can perform
operations that are not allowed in setting area 0. These operations include
writing data at the initial setting level.
At power-ON, the Temperature Controller is set in setting area 0. To move to
setting area 1, use the “move-to-setting area 1” command. To return to setting
area 0, turn the power OFF and ON again, or use the “software reset” command.
Power ON
Software reset command
Setting area 0
Setting area 1
“Move-to-setting area
1” command
Control in progress
Control stopped.
73
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9
Commands and Responses
Various commands are provided for the application layer to implement services, such as variable area reading/writing and operation commands, supported by the CompoWay/F communications protocol.
This section describes the commands provided for the application layer.
5-9-1
Read Monitor Value
Command
MRC
“01”
SRC
“01”
Variable
type
“C0”
Address
Bit
No. of
position elements
“00”
“0001”
Monitor value
ch
“0000”
Address
1
Address
Monitor value
Data name
ch
2
Data name
PV
“0100”
PV
“0001”
“0002”
Status
Internal SP
“0101”
“0102”
“0003”
“0004”
Heater current value
“0103”
monitor
MV monitor for heating “0104”
Heater current value
monitor
MV monitor for heating
“0005”
“0006
MV monitor for cooling “0105”
PV hold value
“0106”
MV monitor for cooling
PV hold value
Status
Internal SP
This command reads the current PV, status, or other monitor values. If the
number of elements is set between “2” and “6”, consecutive address monitor
values can be read.
If the Temperature Controller is in setting area 1 when the command is
received, it returns a response with the “unknown” data for all data except
“status,” which shows the operation status.
Response
MRC
“01”
SRC
“01”
Response code
“0000”
Data
Monitor value
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-5 Read from Variable Area.
74
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-2
Read Setting Data
Command
MRC
“01”
SRC
“01”
Variable
type
Variable
type
Address
Bit
No. of
position elements
“00”
“0001”
Address
ch
Setting data
Description
“C1”
“0000” to “0019”
“0100” to “0119”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C3”
“0000” to “003E”
“0100” to “013E”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
“C5”
“0000”
“0100”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C7”
“0000” to “0001”
“0100” to “0101”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
This command reads setting data. If the number of elements is set between
“2” and “6”, consecutive address setting data can be read.
Refer to 5-10 Variable Area Map for information on specifying variable types
and addresses.
This command can be used in either setting area 0 or 1.
Response
MRC
“01”
SRC
“01”
Response code
“0000”
Data
Status
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-5 Read from Variable Area.
75
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-3
Multiple Reads of Monitor Values/Setting Data
Command
MRC
SRC
“01”
“04”
Variable
type
Address
Bit
Variable
position type
“00”
Address
Variable
type
Variable
type
Address
ch
Bit
position
“00”
Address
Bit
position
“00”
Monitor value/setting data
Description
“C0”
“0000” to “0006”
“0100” to “0106”
1
2
Monitor value
“C1”
“0000” to “0019”
“0100” to “0119”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C3”
“0000” to “003E”
“0100” to “013E”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
“C5”
“0000”
“0100”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C7”
“0000” to “0001”
“0100” to “0101”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
Multiple monitor values or setting data values can be read with the execution
of one command. Up to 5 values can be read, even if the addresses are not
consecutive.
Refer to 5-10 Variable Area Map for information on specifying variable types
and addresses.
This command can be used in either setting area 0 or 1.
No data will be read if an area type error or parameter error occurs in any of
the data.
Response
MRC
“01”
Variable
SRC Response code type
Type
“04”
“0000”
Data
Monitor value/setting data
Variable
type
Type
Data
Monitor value/setting data
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-5 Read from Variable Area.
76
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-4
Write Protect Level Setting Data
Command
MRC
Variable
type
“02”
“C1”
SRC
“01”
Address
Bit
No. of
position elements
“00”
“0001”
Address
“0000”
Setting data
Operation/adjustment protection
“0001”
Initial setting/communications protection
“0002”
“0100”
Setting change protection
Operation/adjustment protection
“0101”
Initial setting/communications protection
Setting change protection
“0102”
Data
Protect level setting data
This command writes protect level setting data. For details on protect levels,
refer to 6-3 Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys.
This command can be used in setting area 0 only. If the Temperature Controller is in setting area 1 when the command is received, it returns an error.
Before executing the command, use operation commands to enable writing
and to enter the protect level.
Response
MRC
“01”
SRC Response code
“02”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-6 Write to Variable Area.
77
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-5
Write Setting Data
Command
MRC
SRC
“01”
“02”
Variable
type
Variable
type
Address
Bit
No. of
position elements
“00”
“0001”
Address
ch
Data
Setting data (setting area 1)
Setting data
Description
“C1”
“0000” to “0019”
“0100” to “0119”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C3”
“0000” to “003E”
“0100” to “013E”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
“C5”
“0000”
“0100”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C7”
“0000” to “0001”
“0100” to “0101”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
This command writes setting data. If the number of elements is set between
“2” and “6”, consecutive address setting data can be written.
For details on addressing, refer to 5-10 Variable Area Map.
This command can be used in setting area 1 only. If the Temperature Controller is in setting area 0 when the command is received, it returns an error.
Before executing the command, use operation commands to enable communications writing.
To save the operation/adjustment level setting data to internal non-volatile
memory, use the “write mode” operation command to set the write mode to
“backup.” If it is not set to backup mode, the setting data will not be stored
when the power is turned OFF. Refer to 6-3 Setup Level Configuration and
Front Panel Keys for details on the operation/adjustment level.
Response
MRC
“01”
SRC Response code
“02”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-6 Write to Variable Area.
78
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-6
Multiple Writes of Setting Data
Command
MRC
SRC
“01”
“13”
Variable
type
Address
Variable
type
Bit
position
“00”
Address
Data
Setting data
Bit
position
“00”
Variable
type
Address
ch
Data
Setting data
Setting data
Description
“C1”
“0000” to “0019”
“0100” to “0119”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C3”
“0000” to “003E”
“0100” to “013E”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
“C5”
“0000”
“0100”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 0
“C7”
“0000” to “0001”
“0100” to “0101”
1
2
Setting data for setting area 1
Multiple setting data can be written with the execution of one command. Up to
3 values can be written, even if the addresses are not consecutive.
Refer to 5-10 Variable Area Map for information on specifying variable types
and addresses.
Setting area 1 setting data can be written in setting area 1 only. An error will
be returned if this command is executed for setting area 0.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
To save the operation/adjustment level setting data to internal non-volatile
memory, use the “write mode” operation command to set the write mode to
“backup.” If it is not set to backup mode, the setting data will not be stored
when the power is turned OFF. Refer to 6-3 Setup Level Configuration and
Front Panel Keys for details on the operation/adjustment level.
Response
MRC
“01”
SRC Response code
“13”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-6 Write to Variable Area.
79
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-7
Communications Writing
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
CommandRelated
code
information
“05”
Related
information
”00” or “10”
Description
Communications writing prohibited
”01” or “11”
Communications writing not prohibited
This command enables/disables communications writing.
It rewrites the setting for “communications writing.”
If communications writing is disabled, operation commands for parameter
rewriting, RUN/STOP, and other operations will be rejected.
Default is communications writing enabled.
This command can be used for setting area 0 or 1.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above repres5nts normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-8
Control Start (RUN)/Control Stop (STOP)
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
Command Related
code
information
“01”
Related
information
Contents
Control
ch
“00”
“01”
1
RUN
STOP
”10”
“11”
2
RUN
STOP
“F0”
“F1”
1, 2
RUN (See note.)
STOP (See note.)
This command starts and stops control (RUN/STOP).
This command can be used in either setting area 0 or 1.
Note These variations of the command are supported by upgraded pulse output models and
analog output models only.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
80
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-9
Multi-SP
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“02”
Related
information
Contents
Selected SP
ch
“00”
“01”
1
SP 0
SP 1
”10”
“11”
2
SP 0
SP 1
“F0”
“F1”
1, 2
SP 0 (See note.)
SP 1 (See note.)
This command switches between SPs that have been set in advance for SP 0
and SP1.
“No. of multi-SP uses” must be set to 0 and “Use multi-SP” must be set to ON.
This command can be used for either setting area 0 or 1.
Note These variations of the command are supported by upgraded pulse output models and
analog output models only.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-10 AT Execute/Stop
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“03”
Related
information
ch
Contents
Instruction details
“00”
“01”
1
Stop
Execute
”10”
“11”
2
Stop
Execute
“F0”
“F1”
1, 2
Stop (See note.)
Execute (See note.)
This command executes or stopped autotuning.
This command can be used in setting area 0 only. If it is used in setting area
1, an operation error will be returned. An operation error will also be returned
in the following cases.
• When the “RUN/STOP” parameter for the specified channel is set to
“STOP.”
• When ON/OFF control is being used.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Note These variations of the command are supported by upgraded pulse output models and
analog output models only.
81
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-11 Write Mode
Command
MRC
SRC
“30”
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“04”
Related
information
”00” or “10”
”01” or “11”
Contents
Backup mode
RAM write mode
This command selects backup mode and RAM write mode.
Default is RAM write mode.
This command can be used in either setting area 0 or 1.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Write mode
Backup mode
RAM write mode
Description
When operation/adjustment level setting data write has been
performed via communications, the data is written to internal
non-volatile memory. Refer to 6-3 Setup Level Configuration
and Front Panel Keys for information on operation/adjustment
level.
When operation/adjustment level setting data write has been
performed via communications, the data is not written to internal non-volatile memory. However, if the data is changed
using the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit key operations, it is
written to internal non-volatile memory. Refer to 6-3 Setup
Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys for information on
operation/adjustment level.
When switching from RAM write mode to backup mode, the operation/adjustment level setting data is written to internal non-volatile memory. Refer to 6-3
Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys for information on operation/
adjustment level.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
82
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-12 RAM Data Save
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“05”
“00” or “10”
This command writes operation/adjustment level setting data to internal nonvolatile memory. Refer to 6.3 6-3 Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel
Keys for information on operation/adjustment level.
This command can be used for either setting area 0 or 1.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-13 Software Reset
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“06”
“00” or “10”
This command triggers a software reset, which returns the Temperature Controller to its initial state when it was turned ON.
This command can be used in either setting area 0 or 1.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Response
The Temperature Controller does not return a response to this command.
83
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-14 Move to Setting Area 1
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“07”
“00” or “10”
Use this command to move to setting area 1.
Use this command in setting area 0. If the Temperature Controller is in setting
area 1 when the command is received, the command is ignored.
If the set value of the “initial setting/communications protection” parameter is
2 (indicating that moving to initial setting or communications setting level is
disabled) when the Temperature Controller receives the command, the Temperature Controller returns an error.
Before executing this command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-15 Move to Protect Level
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“08”
“00” or “10”
This command moves the Temperature Controller to the protect level. Refer to
6-3 Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys for information on protect
level.
This command can be used in setting area 0 only. If the Temperature Controller is in setting area 1 when the command is received, it returns an error.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
84
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-16 Auto/Manual
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“09”
Related
information
Contents
ch
Operation mode
“00”
1
Auto
“01”
“10”
2
Manual
Auto
“11”
Manual
“F0”
“F1”
1, 2
Auto (See note.)
Manual (See note.)
This command selects automatic/manual operation. It can be used when the
“PID/OnOff” parameter is set to PID.
This command can be used in either setting area 0 or 1.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Note These variations of the command are supported by upgraded pulse output models and
analog output models only.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-17 PV Hold
Command
MRC
“30”
SRC
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“0A”
“00” or “10”
This command saves the PV when the command was executed in the variable
area.
This command can be used for setting area 0. If it is used in setting area 1, an
operation error will be returned.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
85
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-18 Parameter Initialize
Command
MRC
SRC
“30”
“05”
CommandRelated
code
information
“0B”
“00” or “10”
This command returns all settings to the default values.
This command can be used for setting area 0. If it is used in setting area 1, an
operation error will be returned.
Before executing the command, use an operation command to enable communications writing.
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-19 Alarm Latch Cancel
Command
MRC
SRC
CommandRelated
code
information
“05”
“0C”
Related
information
ch
“30”
“00”
“01”
1
“02”
“0F”
“10”
“11”
“F1”
Cancel alarm latch 1 for ch1
Cancel alarm latch 2 for ch1
Cancel alarm latch 3 for ch1
Cancel all alarm latches for
ch1
2
“12”
“1F”
“F0”
Contents
Operation mode (See note.)
1, 2
Cancel alarm latch 1 for ch2
Cancel alarm latch 2 for ch2
Cancel alarm latch 3 for ch2
Cancel all alarm latches for
ch2
Cancel alarm latch 1 for ch1,
ch2
Cancel alarm latch 2 for ch1,
ch2
“F2”
Cancel alarm latch 3 for ch1,
ch2
“FF”
Cancel all alarm latches for
ch1, ch2
This command cancels the alarm latch. The command can be used in setting
area 0 or 1. The corresponding alarm output latch status will be cancelled
when latch cancel is specified.
Note This command is supported by upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only.
86
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
Response
MRC
“30”
SRC Response code
“05”
“0000”
Response code: The code shown above represents normal completion. For
details on the response code, refer to 5-7 Operation Commands.
5-9-20 Read Controller Attribute
Command
MRC
“05”
SRC
“03”
This command reads the model name and communication buffer size of the
Temperature Controller.
The command can be used regardless of what state the Temperature Controller is in.
Response
MRC
“05”
SRC Response code
“03”
“0000”
Model name
No. of
control
points
E5ZN-2QNH0
2
E5ZN-2QPH0
2
E5ZN-2TNH0
2
E5ZN-2TPH0
2
E5ZN-2CNF0
2
E5ZN-2CPF0
2
Model name
Buffer size
“0048”
Control
output
Auxiliary
output 1, 2
Auxiliary
output 3, 4
Heater
burnout
alarm
Pulse voltage output
Pulse voltage output
Transistor
output
Transistor
output
Transistor output (sinking)
Supported
Transistor output (sourcing)
Supported
Transistor output (sinking)
Transistor output (sourcing)
Supported
Linear
current
output
Linear
voltage
output
Transistor out- Linear voltput (sinking)
age output
Not supported
Transistor out- Linear voltput (sourcing) age output
Not supported
Supported
The model name is expressed in 10-byte ASCII.
A fixed value of “0048H” (72 bytes) for the buffer size is returned.
Response Code
Response
code
Error name
Description
“1001”
“2203”
Command length over
Operation error
The command is too long.
An error occurs in EEPROM.
“0000”
Normal completion
The command is successfully executed.
87
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-21 Read Controller Status
Command
MRC
“06”
SRC
“01”
This command reads the operation status of the Temperature Controller.
The command can be used regardless of what state the Temperature Controller is in.
Response
MRC
“06”
SRC
Response code Operation
status
Related
information
“0000”
“01”
Operation status
“00”
Description
Control operating for all channels (No errors in setting area 0,
executing RUN.)
“01”
Control has stopped for one channel (Errors other than errors
in setting area 0, not executing RUN.)
Related Information
7
0
6
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
Bit position
Value of bit
Status
0
Current exceeded
Current hold
Input error
Not
detected
Not
detected
Not
detected
1
Detected
Detected
Detected
If the Temperature Controller is in setting area 1 when the command is
received, it returns a response with “unknown” related information.
Response Code
Response
code
88
Error name
Description
“1001”
“2203”
Command length over
Operation error
The command is too long.
An error occurs in EEPROM.
“0000”
Normal completion
The command is successfully executed.
Section 5-9
Commands and Responses
5-9-22 Echoback Test
Command
MRC
“08”
SRC
Data to be tested
“01”
0 to 23 bytes
This command performs an echoback test.
The command can be used regardless of the state of the Temperature Controller.
Data to be checked must not exceed the communications data length.
Communication data length
Description
7 bits
8 bits
Response
MRC
“08”
20H to 7EH converted to ASCII code
20H to 7EH or A1H to FEH converted to ASCII code
SRC
“01”
Response code
Data to be tested
“0000”
0 to 23 bytes
Response Code
Response
code
Error name
Description
“1001”
“2203”
Command length over
Operation error
The command is too long.
An error occurs in EEPROM.
“0000”
Normal completion
The command is successfully executed.
89
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
5-10 Variable Area Map
The variable area of the Temperature Controller is mapped in terms of variable types and addresses as described below.
Variable type C0: Read-only data for setting area 0, including PVs and status
Variable type C1: Setting data for setting area 0
Variable type C3: Setting data for setting area 1
Variable type C5: Setting data for setting area 0
Variable type C7: Setting data for setting area 1
Allocations for each variable are listed below.
A dash (-) in the “ch” column indicates data that is used by both channels.
Note
Variable
Address
type
C0
0000
1.
2.
3.
ch
1
This data is used by pulse output models only.
This data is used by analog output models only.
This data is used by upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only.
Monitor value
PV
Description
Temperature: According to specified range for each sensor.
Analog:
Scaling lower limit − 5% FS to scaling upper limit + 5% FS
0001
0002
Status
Internal SP
Refer to page 91.
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
0003
Heater current value
monitor
00000000H to 00000226H (0.0 to 55.0) (See note 1.)
0004
MV monitor for heating Standard: FFFFFFCEH to 0000041AH (−5.0 to 105.0)
Heating/cooling: 00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
0005
0006
MV monitor for cooling 00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
PV hold value
Temperature: According to specified range for each sensor
0100
2
PV
Analog:
Scaling lower limit − 5% FS to scaling upper limit + 5% FS
Value stored in internal non-volatile memory (RAM) when the
“PV hold” operation command was executed.
Temperature: According to specified range for each sensor
Analog:
Scaling lower limit − 5% FS to scaling upper limit 5% + FS
90
0101
0102
Status
Internal SP
Refer to page 91.
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
0103
0104
Heater current value
00000000H to 00000226H (0.0 to 55.0) (See note 1.)
monitor
MV monitor for heating Standard: FFFFFFCEH to 0000041AH (-5.0 to 105.0)
0105
Heating/cooling: 00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
MV monitor for cooling 00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
0106
PV hold value
Temperature: According to specified range for each sensor
Analog:
Scaling lower limit − 5% FS to scaling upper limit + 5% FS
Value stored in internal non-volatile memory (RAM) when the
“PV hold” operation command was executed.
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
0
8
7
0
6
5
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
Bit position
Value of bit
Status
0
1
Current exceeded Not detected
Detected
Current hold
Refresh
Hold
Indicate range
exceeded.
Not detected
Detected
Input error
Not detected
Detected
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
HB output
OFF
ON
Alarm output 1
OFF
ON
Alarm output 2
OFF
ON
Alarm output 3
OFF
ON
Heating output
(See note.)
Cooling output
(See note.)
Note: For pulse output models, the status of these bits
shows the status of the corresponding operation
indicators. For analog output modes, the status
of these bits is undefined (i.e., the bits will not
necessarily show the status of the indicators).
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Bit position
Status
Value of bit
0
1
Event input
OFF
ON
Write mode
Backup
RAM write
EEPROM
(See note.)
RAM = EEPROM
RAM ≠ EEPROM
Setting area
Setting area 0
Setting area 1
AT execute/cancel AT canceled
AT executing
RUN/STOP
RUN
STOP
Data writing
Disable
Enable
Auto/manual
Automatic
Manual
Note: EEPROM is the internal non-volatile memory.
91
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C1
0000
-
Setting data name
Operation/adjustment
protection
Description
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
0001
Initial setting/communica- 00000000H (0):
tions protection
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
0002
Setting change protection 00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
0003
0004
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0005
0006
Alarm upper limit value 1
Alarm lower limit value 1
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0007
0008
Alarm value 2
Alarm upper limit value 2
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0009
000A
Alarm lower limit value 2
Alarm value 3
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
000B
Manual manipulated
value
Standard: FFFFFFCEH to 0000041AH (−5.0 to 105.0)
000C
Heater burnout detection
Heating/cooling: FFFFFBE6H to 0000041AH (−105.0 to 105.0)
00000000H to 000001F4H (0.0 to 50.0) (See note 1.)
000D
000E
SP 0
SP 1
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
000F
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
0012
Temperature input offset
value
Upper limit temperature
input offset value
Lower limit temperature
input offset value
Proportional band
0013
0014
Integral time
Derivative time
00000000H to 00000F9FH (0 to 3999)
00000000H to 00000F9FH (0 to 3999)
0015
0016
Cooling coefficient
Dead band
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.01 to 99.99)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
0017
0018
Manual reset value
Heating hysteresis
00000000H to 000003E8H (0.0 to 100.0)
00000000H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
0019
Cooling hysteresis
00000000H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
0011
92
Moving to initial level/communications setting
level enabled and moving to advanced function setting level displayed.
Moving to initial level/communications setting
level enabled and moving to advanced function setting level not displayed.
Moving to initial setting/communications setting levels is disabled.
OFF (Setting changes using the E5ZN-SDL
enabled.)
ON (Setting changes using the E5ZN-SDL disabled.)
SP
Alarm value 1
0010
1
No restriction at the operation/adjustment levels
Moving to adjustment level is disabled.
Only “PV” and “PV/SP” display and change
enabled.
Only “PV” and “PV/SP” display enabled.
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C1
0100
-
Setting data name
Operation/adjustment
protection
Description
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
0101
Initial setting/communica- 00000000H (0):
tions protection
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
0102
Setting change protection 00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
0103
0104
2
SP
Alarm value 1
No restriction at the operation/adjustment levels
Moving to adjustment level is disabled.
Only “PV” and “PV/SP” display and change
enabled.
Only “PV” and “PV/SP” display enabled.
Moving to initial level/communications setting
level enabled and moving to advanced function setting level displayed.
Moving to initial level/communications setting
level enabled and moving to advanced function setting level not displayed.
Moving to initial setting/communication setting
levels is disabled.
OFF (Setting changes using E5ZN-SDL
enabled.)
ON (Setting changes using E5ZN-SDL disabled.)
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0105
0106
Upper limit alarm value 1 FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
Lower limit alarm value 1 FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0107
0108
Alarm value 2
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
Upper limit alarm value 2 FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0109
010A
Lower limit alarm value 2 FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
Alarm value 3
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
010B
010C
Manual manipulated vari- Standard: FFFFFFCEH to 0000041AH (−5.0 to 105.0)
able
Heating/cooling: FFFFFBE6H to 0000041AH (−105.0 to 105.0)
Heater burnout detection 00000000H to 000001F4H (0.0 to 50.0) (See note 1.)
010D
010E
SP 0
SP 1
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
Lower limit of SP to upper limit of SP
010F
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
0112
Temperature input offset
value
Upper limit temperature
input offset value
Lower limit temperature
input offset value
Proportional band
0113
0114
Integral time
Derivative time
00000000H to 00000F9FH (0 to 3999)
00000000H to 00000F9FH (0 to 3999)
0115
0116
Cooling coefficient
Dead band
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.01 to 99.99)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
0117
0118
Manual reset value
Heating hysteresis
00000000H to 000003E8H (0.0 to 100.0)
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
0119
Cooling hysteresis
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
0110
0111
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
93
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
0000
-
Setting data name
Input type
Description
Platinum-resistance thermometer input type:
00000000H (0): Pt (−200 to 850°C or −300 to 1,500°F)
00000001H (1): Pt (−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to 900.0°F)
00000002H (2): Pt (0.0 to 100°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F)
00000003H (3): JPt (−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to 900.0°F)
00000004H (4): JPt (0.0 to 100.0°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F)
Thermocouple input type:
00000000H (0): K (−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F)
00000001H (1): K (−20.0 to 500.0°C or 0.0 to 900.0°F)
00000002H (2): J (−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F)
00000003H (3): J (−20.0 to 400.0°C or 0.0 to 750.0°F)
00000004H (4): T (−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F)
00000005H (5): E (0 to 600°C or 0 to 1,100°F)
00000006H (6): L (−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F)
00000007H (7): U (−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F)
00000008H (8): N (−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F)
00000009H (9): R (0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F)
0000000AH (10): S (0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F)
0000000BH (11): B (100 to 1,800°C or 300 to 3,200°F)
0000000CH (12): Infrared temperature sensor (K10 to 70°C)
0000000DH (13): Infrared temperature sensor (K60 to 120°C)
0000000EH (14): Infrared temperature sensor (K115 to 165°C)
0000000FH (15): Infrared temperature sensor (K160 to 260°C)
00000010H (16): 0 to 50 mV
00000011H (17): T (−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to 700.0°F)
00000012H (18): U (−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to 700.0°F)
0001
94
1
Scaling upper limit
0002
Scaling lower limit
0003
Decimal point position
Scaling lower limit + 1 to 0000270FH (scaling lower limit + 1 to
9,999)
FFFFF831H to scaling upper limit −1 (−1,999 to scaling upper
limit − 1)
00000000H to 00000001H (0 to 1)
0004
-
Temperature units
00000000H (0): °C
00000001H (1): °F
0005
1
SP upper limit
Temperature: SP lower limit + 1 to input range upper limit
Analog: SP lower limit + 1 to scaling upper limit
0006
SP lower limit
Temperature: Input range lower limit to SP upper limit − 1
Analog: Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit −1
0007
PID/OnOff
0008
Heating control period
00000000H (0): ON/OFF
00000001H (1): 2-PID control
00000001H to 00000063H (1 to 99)
0009
000A
Cooling control period
Direct/reverse operation
00000001H to 00000063H (1 to 99)
00000000H (0): Reverse operation
00000001H (1): Direct operation
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
000B
1
Alarm 1 type
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
00000004H (4):
00000005H (5):
000C
000D
Alarm 2 type
Alarm 3 type
Same as for alarm 1 type
Same as for alarm 1 type
Control output 1 allocation
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
000E
-
Setting data name
Description
No alarm function
Upper and lower limit alarm
Upper limit alarm
Lower limit alarm
Upper and lower limit range alarm
Upper and lower limit alarm with standby
sequence
00000006H (6): Upper limit alarm with standby sequence
00000007H (7): Lower limit alarm with standby sequence
00000008H (8): Absolute value upper limit alarm
00000009H (9): Absolute value lower limit alarm
0000000AH (10): Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby
sequence
0000000BH (11): Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby
sequence
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
00000004H (4):
00000005H (5):
00000006H (6):
00000007H (7):
00000008H (8):
00000009H (9):
Heating control output for ch1
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch1
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch1 (See
note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch1 (See note 2.)
Alarm 2 output for ch1
Alarm 3 output for ch1
Heating control output for ch2
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch2
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2 (See
note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch2 (See note 2.)
Alarm 2 output for ch2
Alarm 3 output for ch2
0000000AH (10): SP transfer output for ch1 (See note 2.)
0000000BH (11): Ramp SP transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000CH (12): PV transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000DH (13): Heating MV transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000EH (14): Cooling MV transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000FH (15): SP transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000010H (16): Ramp SP transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000011H (17): PV transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000012H (18): Heating MV transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000013H (19): Cooling MV transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
000F
Control output 2 allocation
Same as for control output 1 allocation
95
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
0010
-
Setting data name
Auxiliary output 1 allocation
Description
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
00000004H (4):
00000005H (5):
00000006H (6):
00000007H (7):
00000008H (8):
00000009H (9):
0011
Auxiliary output 2 allocation
Operation after power
ON
Same as for control output 1 allocation
0013
Communications data
length
0014
Communications stop bit
0015
Communications parity
00000007H (7): 7
00000008H (8): 8
00000001H (1): 1
00000002H (2): 2
00000000H (0): None
00000001H (1): Even
00000002H (2): Odd
0016
Communications
response transmission
wait time
00000000H to 0000270FH (0 to 9,999)
0017
No. of multi-SP uses
00000000H (0): No multi-SP
00000001H (1): Switch between SP0/1
0018
Event input function
0012
0019
96
Heating control output for ch1
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch1
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch1 (See
note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch1 (See note 2.)
Alarm 2 output for ch1
Alarm 3 output for ch1
Heating control output for ch2
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch2
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2 (See
note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch2 (See note 2.)
Alarm 2 output for ch2
Alarm 3 output for ch2
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
Stop
Continue (Continues the operation status from
before the power supply was stopped.)
00000000H (0): Non
00000001H (1): RUN/STOP
Use multi-SP
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
SP ramp setting
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H to 0000270FH (1 to 9,999)
Standby sequence restart 00000000H (0): Condition A
00000001H (1): Condition B
001A
1
001B
-
001C
1
Alarm 1 open in alarm
00000000H (0): Closed
00000001H (1): Open
001D
001E
1
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 open in alarm
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
00000000H (0): Closed
00000001H (1): Open
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
001F
Alarm 2 hysteresis
0020
Alarm 3 open in alarm
0021
Alarm 3 hysteresis
00000000H (0): Closed
00000001H (1): Open
00000001H to 00002702FH (0.1 to 999.9)
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
0022
-
0023
Setting data name
Description
Use heater burnout
(See note 1.)
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
(See note 1.)
Heater burnout latch
(See note 1.)
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
(See note 1.)
0024
1
Heater burnout hysteresis
00000001H to 000001F4H (0.1 to 50.0)
(See note 1.)
0025
0026
1
α
MV upper limit
00000000H to 00000064H (0.00 to 1.00)
Standard: Manipulated variable lower limit + 0.1 to 0000041AH
(manipulated variable lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0)
Heating/cooling: 00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
Standard: FFFFFFCEH to manipulated variable upper limit − 0.1
(−5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit − 0.1)
Heating/cooling: FFFFFBE6H to 00000000H (105.0 to 0.0)
00000000H to 0000270FH (0.0 to 999.9)
0027
MV lower limit
0028
Input digital filter
0029
-
002A
002B
1
Additional PV display
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
Temperature input offset
display add
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
Alarm 1 latch
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
002C
Alarm 2 latch
002D
Alarm 3 latch
002E
-
Cold junction compensation method
97
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
002F
-
Description
Auxiliary output 3 allocation (See note 2.)
Heating control output for ch1
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch1
00000002H (2): Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch1
00000003H (3): Alarm 2 output for ch1
00000004H (4): Alarm 3 output for ch1
00000005H (5): Heating control output for ch2
00000006H (6): Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch2
00000007H (7): Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch2
00000008H (8): Alarm 2 output for ch2
00000009H (9): Alarm 3 output for ch2
0000000AH (10): SP transfer output for ch1
0000000BH (11): Ramp SP transfer output for ch1
0000000CH (12): PV transfer output for ch1
0000000DH (13): Heating MV transfer output for ch1
0000000EH (14): Cooling MV transfer output for ch1
0000000FH (15): SP transfer output for ch2
00000010H (16): Ramp SP transfer output for ch2
00000011H (17): PV transfer output for ch2
00000012H (18): Heating MV transfer output for ch2
00000013H (19): Cooling MV transfer output for ch2
Auxiliary output 4 allocation (See note 2.)
OUT1 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
OUT1 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
OUT2 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
OUT2 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
Same as for auxiliary output 3 allocation.
0035
SUB3 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0036
SUB3 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0037
SUB4 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
SUB4 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
Current output type (See
note 2.)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0030
0031
0032
0033
0034
0038
0039
003A
98
Setting data name
Voltage output type (See
note 2.)
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
00000000H(0): 4 to 20 mA DC
00000001H(1): 0 to 20 mA DC
00000000H(0): 1 to 5 VDC
00000001H(1): 0 to 5 VDC
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
003B
-
Setting data name
Description
Sensor error indicator
(See note 2.)
00000000H(0): Indicators always not lit
00000001H(1): Sensor error indicator lit (ch1 only)
00000002H(2): Sensor error indicator lit (ch2 only)
00000003H(3): Sensor error indicator lit (ch1 or ch2)
003C
Remote-local logic (See
note 2.)
00000000H(0): Reverse logic
00000001H(1): Normal
003D
Input error output (See
note 2.)
00000000H(0): OFF
00000001H(1): ON
003E
Input shift type (See note 00000000H(0): One-point temperature input shift
2.)
00000001H(1): Two-point temperature input shift
99
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
0100
-
Setting data name
Input type
Description
Platinum-resistance thermometer input type:
00000000H (0): Pt (−200 to 850°C or −300 to 1,500°F)
00000001H (1): Pt (−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to 900.0°F)
00000002H (2): Pt (0.0 to 100°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F)
00000003H (3): JPt (−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to 900.0°F)
00000004H (4): JPt (0.0 to 100.0°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F)
Thermocouple input type:
00000000H (0): K (−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F)
00000001H (1): K (−20.0 to 500.0°C or 0.0 to 900.0°F)
00000002H (2): J (−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F)
00000003H (3): J (−20.0 to 400.0°C or 0.0 to 750.0°F)
00000004H (4): T (−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F)
00000005H (5): E (0 to 600°C or 0 to 1,100°F)
00000006H (6): L (−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F)
00000007H (7): U (−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F)
00000008H (8): N (−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F)
00000009H (9): R (0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F)
0000000AH (10): S (0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F)
0000000BH (11): B (100 to 1,800°C or 300 to 3,200°F)
0000000CH (12): Infrared temperature sensor (K10 to 70°C)
0000000DH (13): Infrared temperature sensor (K60 to 120°C)
0000000EH (14): Infrared temperature sensor (K115 to 165°C)
0000000FH (15): Infrared temperature sensor (K160 to 260°C)
00000010H (16): 0 to 50 mV
00000011H (17): T (−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to 700.0°F)
00000012H (18): U (−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to 700.0°F)
0101
100
2
Scaling upper limit
0102
Scaling lower limit
0103
Decimal point position
Scaling lower limit + 1 to 0000270FH (scaling lower limit + 1 to
9,999)
FFFFF831H to scaling upper limit −1 (−1,999 to scaling upper
limit − 1)
00000000H to 00000001H (0 to 1)
0104
-
Temperature units
00000000H (0): °C
00000001H (1): °F
0105
2
SP upper limit
Temperature: SP lower limit + 1 to input range upper limit
Analog: SP lower limit + 1 to scaling upper limit
0106
SP lower limit
Temperature: Input range lower limit to SP upper limit − 1
Analog: Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit −1
0107
PID/ OnOff
0108
Heating control period
00000000H (0): ON/OFF
00000001H (1): 2-PID control
00000001H to 00000063H (1 to 99)
0109
010A
Cooling control period
Direct/reverse operation
00000001H to 00000063H (1 to 99)
00000000H (0): Reverse operation
00000001H (1): Direct operation
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
010B
2
Alarm 1 type
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
00000004H (4):
00000005H (5):
010C
010D
Alarm 2 type
Alarm 3 type
Same as for alarm 1 type
Same as for alarm 1 type
Control output 1 allocation
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
Control output 2 allocation
Same as for control output 1 allocation
010E
010F
-
Setting data name
Description
No alarm function
Upper and lower limit alarm
Upper limit alarm
Lower limit alarm
Upper and lower limit range alarm
Upper and lower limit alarm with standby
sequence
00000006H (6): Upper limit alarm with standby sequence
00000007H (7): Lower limit alarm with standby sequence
00000008H (8): Absolute value upper limit alarm
00000009H (9): Absolute value lower limit alarm
0000000AH (10): Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby
sequence
0000000BH (11): Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby
sequence
Heating control output for ch1
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch1
00000002H (2): Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch1
(See note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch1(See note 2.)
00000003H (3): Alarm 2 output for ch1
00000004H (4): Alarm 3 output for ch1
00000005H (5): Heating control output for ch2
00000006H (6): Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch2
00000007H (7): Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2 (See
note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch2 (See note 2.)
00000008H (8): Alarm 2 output for ch2
00000009H (9): Alarm 3 output for ch2
0000000AH (10): SP transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000BH (11): Ramp SP transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000CH (12): PV transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000DH (13): Heating MV transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000EH (14): Cooling MV transfer output for ch1
(See note 2.)
0000000FH (15): SP transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000010H (16): Ramp SP transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000011H (17): PV transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000012H (18): Heating MV transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
00000013H (19): Cooling MV transfer output for ch2
(See note 2.)
101
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
0110
-
Setting data name
Auxiliary output 1 allocation
Description
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
00000002H (2):
00000003H (3):
00000004H (4):
00000005H (5):
00000006H (6):
00000007H (7):
00000008H (8):
00000009H (9):
0111
Auxiliary output 2 allocation
Operation after power
ON
Same as for auxiliary output 1 allocation
0113
Communications data
length
0114
Communications stop bit
0115
Communications parity
00000007H (7): 7
00000008H (8): 8
00000001H (1): 1
00000002H (2): 2
00000000H (0): None
00000001H (1): Even
00000002H (2): Odd
0116
Communications
response transmission
wait time
00000000H to 0000270FH (0 to 9,999)
0117
No. of multi-SP uses
00000000H (0): No multi-SP
00000001H (1): Switch between SP0/1
0118
Event input allocation
0119
Use multi-SP
00000000H (0): None
00000001H (1): RUN/STOP
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
0112
102
Heating control output for ch1
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch1
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch1
(See note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch1(See note 2.)
Alarm 2 output for ch1
Alarm 3 output for ch1
Heating control output for ch2
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch2
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2 (See
note 1.)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch2 (See note 2.)
Alarm 2 output for ch2
Alarm 3 output for ch2
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
Stop
Continue (Continues the operation status from
before the power supply was stopped.)
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
011A
2
011B
-
011C
2
011D
011E
Setting data name
Description
SP ramp setting
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H to 0000270FH (1 to 9,999)
Standby sequence restart 00000000H (0): Condition A
00000001H (1): Condition B
Alarm 1 open in alarm
00000000H (0): Closed
00000001H (1): Open
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 open in alarm
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
00000000H (0): Closed
00000001H (1): Open
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
011F
Alarm 2 hysteresis
0120
Alarm 3 open in alarm
00000000H (0): Closed
00000001H (1): Open
Alarm 3 hysteresis
Use heater burnout (See
note 1.)
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
Heater burnout latch
(See note 1.)
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
0121
0122
-
0123
0124
2
Heater burnout hysteresis (See note 1.)
00000001H to 000001F4H (0.1 to 50.0)
0125
0126
2
α
MV upper limit
00000000H to 00000064H (0.00 to 1.00)
Standard: Manipulated variable lower limit + 0.1 to 0000041AH
(manipulated variable lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0)
Heating/cooling: 00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
Standard: FFFFFFCEH to manipulated variable upper limit − 0.1
(−5.0 to manipulated variable upper limit − 0.1)
Heating/cooling: FFFFFBE6H to 00000000H (105.0 to 0.0)
0127
0128
0129
MV lower limit
Input digital filter
Additional PV display
00000000H to 0000270FH (0.0 to 999.9)
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
Temperature input offset
display add
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
Alarm 1 latch
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
012C
Alarm 2 latch
012D
Alarm 3 latch
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
00000000H (0): OFF
00000001H (1): ON
-
012A
012B
012E
2
-
Cold junction compensation method
103
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C3
012F
-
Description
Auxiliary output 3 allocation (See note 2.)
Heating control output for ch1
Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch1
00000002H (2): Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch1
00000003H (3): Alarm 2 output for ch1
00000004H (4): Alarm 3 output for ch1
00000005H (5): Heating control output for ch2
00000006H (6): Cooling control output for heating/cooling control for ch2
00000007H (7): Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for
ch2
00000008H (8): Alarm 2 output for ch2
00000009H (9): Alarm 3 output for ch2
0000000AH (10): SP transfer output for ch1
0000000BH (11): Ramp SP transfer output for ch1
0000000CH (12): PV transfer output for ch1
0000000DH (13): Heating MV transfer output for ch1
0000000EH (14): Cooling MV transfer output for ch1
0000000FH (15): SP transfer output for ch2
00000010H (16): Ramp SP transfer output for ch2
00000011H (17): PV transfer output for ch2
00000012H (18): Heating MV transfer output for ch2
00000013H (19): Cooling MV transfer output for ch2
Auxiliary output 4 allocation (See note 2.)
OUT1 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
OUT1 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
OUT2 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
OUT2 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
Same as for auxiliary output 3 allocation
0135
SUB3 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0136
SUB3 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0137
SUB4 transfer output
upper limit (See note 2.)
SUB4 transfer output
lower limit (See note 2.)
Current output type
(See note 2.)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
0130
0131
0132
0133
0134
0138
0139
104
Setting data name
013A
Voltage output type
(See note 2.)
013B
Sensor error indicator
used
(See note 3.)
013D
Input error output
(See note 3.)
013E
Input shift type
(See note 3.)
00000000H (0):
00000001H (1):
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9)
00000000H(0): 4 to 20 mA DC
00000001H(1): 0 to 20 mA DC
00000000H(0): 1 to 5 VDC
00000001H(1): 0 to 5 VDC
00000000H(0): Indicators always not lit.
00000001H(1): Sensor error indicator lit (ch1 only)
00000002H(2): Sensor error indicator lit (ch2 only)
00000003H(3): Sensor error indicator lit (ch1 or ch2)
00000000H(0): OFF
00000001H(1): ON
00000000H(0): One-point temperature input shift
00000001H(1): Two-point temperature input shift
Section 5-10
Variable Area Map
Variable Address ch
type
C5
0000
1
Setting data name
Remote PV
Description
Temperature: According to specified range for each sensor
Analog:
Scaling lower limit − 5% FS to scaling upper limit + 5% FS
C7
0100
2
Remote PV
Temperature: According to specified range for each sensor
Analog:
Scaling lower limit − 5% FS to scaling upper limit + 5% FS
00000000H (0): OFF (normal mode)
00000001H (1): ON (remote PV mode)
0000
-
Remote PV mode
0001
-
Remote PV communications wait time
00000000H to 0000270F (0 to 9,999) ms
0100
-
Remote PV mode
00000000H (0): OFF (normal mode)
00000001H (1): ON (remote PV mode)
0101
-
Remote PV communications wait time
00000000H to 0000270F (0 to 9,999) ms
105
SECTION 6
Using the E5ZN-SDL
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names of Parts on the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-3 Using the Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-4 Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1 Parameter Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2 Copying Parameters from Master to Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
108
109
109
111
111
111
112
112
114
116
118
118
119
122
107
Section 6-1
Introduction
6-1
Introduction
6-1-1
Outline
The E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit is used to set and display parameters for
E5ZN Temperature Controllers.
Using the E5ZN-SDL simplifies the initial settings and maintenance of the
E5ZN.
6-1-2
Dimension
E5ZN-SDL
(84)
48x48
6
SUB1
SUB2
SUB3
SUB4
14.2
63.7
OUT1
OUT2
STOP
CMW
44.8x44.8
PV
SV
UNIT/CH
UNIT
E5ZN-SDL
COPY
CH
P2CF-11
4.5
7.8
4
35.4
70 max.
Two, 4.5 dia.
40
50 max.
31.2 max.
Note Purchase the P2CF-11 Surface-connecting Socket separately. (The P3GA-11 Backconnecting Socket can also be used.)
108
Section 6-1
Introduction
6-1-3
Preparation
The E5ZN-SDL uses serial communications to display the settings for the
E5ZN Temperature Controller.
Connect the E5ZN-SDL to the E5ZN-SCT24S-500. There is no connection
terminal on the E5ZN-SCT18S-500.
Input power
supply
24 VDC
19
−
+
8
7
20
6
5
B (+)
4
9
3
10 11
1
1.
2.
22
A (−)
2
P2CF-11 Surface-connecting Socket
(The P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket
can also be used.)
Note
21
Temperature Controller
Communications with
the E5ZN
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
Connections between terminals 4 and 9, 7 and 11, and 8 and 10 are made inside
the E5ZN-SDL. Refer to the following connection diagram.
Do not connect anything to terminals 1, 2, 5, or 6.
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
DO NOT
USE.
5
(+)
21
6
Input
power
8
4
B
−
7
+
E5ZN
22
A
(−)
9
3
10
2
11
1
DO NOT
USE.
+
−
System Configuration
PSCF-11
Communications
with the E5ZN
E5ZN-2
Channel 2
E5ZN-2
Channel 1
E5ZN-2
Channel 2
Unit No. setting
Channel 1
100 to 125 Ω
terminator
(1/2W)
Unit No. setting
Channel 2
E5ZN-SDL
Unit No. setting
Channel 1
6-1-4
24 VDC
Communications
Communications
Communications
E5ZN-SCT24S-500
E5ZN-SCT18S-500
E5ZN-SCT18S-500
Side
Connector
Total length:
500 m max.
Special Setting
Display Device
109
Introduction
Section 6-1
• The RS-485 connection can be either one-to-one to one-to-N. Up to 16
units can be connected in one-to-N systems
• Keep the total cable length to 500 m maximum.
• Attach a terminator to both ends of the transmission path.
Note Communications with the E5ZN-SDL will be cut if the E5ZN-2 connection to the E5ZNSCT24S-500 is broken
The E5ZN Temperature Controller and the E5ZN-SDL are connected by serial
communications. When connecting multiple E5ZN Temperature Controllers,
set a different unit number for each one.
The E5ZN-SDL recognizes the E5ZN Temperature Controllers by the unit
numbers. Use the UNIT Key on the E5ZN-SDL to set the unit number of the
E5ZN Temperature Controller to be set and displayed on the E5ZN-SDL.
The E5ZN-2 Temperature Controller has two channel input channels.
Use the CH Key to set the E5ZN-SDL channel number to be displayed.
110
Section 6-2
Names of Parts on the Front Panel
6-2
6-2-1
Names of Parts on the Front Panel
Front Panel
Temperature unit
Operation
indicators
SUB1
SUB2
SUB3
SUB4
PV
No.1 display
OUT1
OUT2
STOP
CMW
UNIT/CH display
SV
No. 2 display
UNIT/CH
Up key
Level key
Down key
UNIT
COPY
CH
E5ZN-SDL
Mode Key
6-2-2
UNIT Key
COPY Key
CH Key
Display
No.1 Display
Displays the type of PV or parameter for the E5ZN Temperature Controller.
No. 2 Display
Displays the PV, read value for the parameter, and the input value when settings are changed for the E5ZN Temperature Controller.
Temperature Unit
The temperature unit is displayed when the display unit parameter for the
E5ZN Temperature Controller is set to a temperature. Indication is determined
by the current set value of the “temperature unit” parameter. When this
parameter is set to °C, “c” is displayed, and when set to °F, “f” is displayed.
Operation Indicators
1,2,3...
1. SUB1 (auxiliary output 1)
Lit when the auxiliary output 1 function is ON.
SUB2 (auxiliary output 2)
Lit when the auxiliary output 2 function is ON.
SUB3 (auxiliary output 3)
Pulse output models: Always not lit.
Analog output models: Not lit when the auxiliary output drops to 0%
or lower.
Lit when the auxiliary output is above 0%.
SUB4 (auxiliary output 4)
Pulse output models: Always not lit.
Analog output models: Not lit when the auxiliary output drops to 0%
or lower.
Lit when the auxiliary output is above 0%.
2. OUT1 (control output 1)
Pulse output models: Lit when the control output 1 function is ON.
Analog output models: Not lit when the control output drops to 0% or
lower.
Lit when the control output is above 0%.
111
Names of Parts on the Front Panel
Section 6-2
OUT2 (control output 2)
Pulse output models: Lit when the control output 2 function is ON.
Analog output models: Not lit when the control output drops to 0% or
lower.
Lit when the control output is above 0%.
3. STOP (stop)
Lit when operation for the selected channel is stopped. Lit when the “RUN/
STOP” parameter is set to STOP. Not lit at all other times.
4. CMW (Communications writing control)
Lit when communications writing is enabled and not lit when writing is disabled.
5. UNIT/CH display
Displays the E5ZN Temperature Indicator unit number and channel number that will be set and displayed on the E5ZN-SDL.
When facing the front panel, the unit number (0 to F) is displayed on the
left and the channel number (1 to 2, U) is displayed on the right.
When the channel number is “U,” the setting and display is used by both
channels.
6-2-3
Using the Keys
Level Key
Press this key to select the setting levels.
Mode Key
Press this key to select parameters within each level.
Up Key
Each press of this key increments values displayed on the No. 2 display. Holding down this key continuously increments values.
Alternatively, the display moves to the next setting item.
Down Key
Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No. 2 display.
Holding down this key continuously decrements values.
Alternatively, the display moves back one setting item.
Level Key + Mode Key
This key combination sets the E5ZN to the “protect level.” For details on the
protect level, refer to 6-3 Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys.
UNIT Key
Each press of this key increments the unit number.
Select the E5ZN Temperature Controller unit number to set for the E5ZN-SDL.
CH Key
Each press of this key changes the channel number.
The channel number cannot be selected when the channel number display for
the E5ZN Temperature Controller is “U” because the setting is used by both
channels.
COPY Key
Press this key to read all E5ZN Temperature Controller set values to the
E5ZN-SDL or to write all set values to the E5ZN from the E5ZN-SDL.
6-2-4
Display
112
Main Functions
The PV and set values for the E5ZN Temperature Controller as well as other
data and control outputs, auxiliary outputs, and other status information can
be displayed.
Names of Parts on the Front Panel
Section 6-2
Settings
The parameters and control operations for the E5ZN Temperature Controller
can be changed.
Copy
All settings for the E5ZN Temperature Controller can be read and saved to the
E5ZN-SDL. Also, all the settings for the E5ZN Temperature Controller that
were saved in the E5ZN-SDL can be written to the E5ZN Temperature Controller.
113
Section 6-3
Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys
6-3
Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys
Parameters are divided into groups called levels. Each of the set values
(setup items) in these levels are called a parameter. The parameters on the
E5ZN are divided into the following seven levels:
Power ON
Normal mode
Copy
Mode
Operation level
Level Key
Less than
1 second
Adjustment level
Level Key 3 seconds min.
Level Key
1 second
min.
Level +
Mode Keys
1 second min.
Level +
Mode Keys
3 seconds
min.
Level Key
The PV display flashes after one second.
Control stops.
Copy Key
Less than
1 second
Copy Key
1 second
min.
Initial
setting level
Level Key
Less than
1 second
Communications
setting level
Protect level
Password input
set value "-169"
Level Key
1 second min.
Control in progress
Advanced function
setting level
Mode/Level
Normal
mode
Control stopped
Protect level
Control in
progress
OK
-
Operation level
Adjustment level
OK
OK
-
Initial setting level
Advanced function setting level
-
OK
OK
Communications setting level
-
OK
OK
Copy mode
Control
stopped
OK: Indicates items that can be set.
Note To move to the advanced function setting level, set the “initial setting/communications
protection” parameter in the “protect level” to “0.”
Of these levels in normal mode, the initial setting level, communications setting level, and advanced function setting level can be used only when control
has stopped. Controller outputs are stopped when any of these four levels are
selected.
It is possible to enter copy mode while Controller outputs are being made, but
copy operations (e.g., upload, download) can by used only when control has
stopped.
114
Setup Level Configuration and Front Panel Keys
Protect Level
Section 6-3
To move the mode to this level, simultaneously press the Level and Mode
Keys for at least three seconds in the operation level or adjustment level. This
level is for preventing unwanted or accidental modification of parameters. Protected levels will not be displayed, and so the parameters in that level cannot
be modified.
Operation Level
• This level is initially displayed when you turn ON the power to the E5ZN.
You can move to the protect level, initial setting level, and adjustment
level from this level.
• During operation, the PV, SP, and manipulated variable can be monitored,
and the SP, alarm value and upper and lower limit alarms can be monitored and modified.
Adjustment Level
• To move the mode to this level, press the Level Key for less than one second.
• This level is for entering set values and offset values for control. This level
contains parameters for setting the autotuning, communications writing
enable/disable, hysteresis, multi-SP, input shift values, heater burnout
alarm (HBA) settings, PID constants, etc. You can move to the top parameter of the initial setting level and operation level from here.
Initial Setting Level
To move the mode to this level, press the Level Key for at least three seconds
in the operation level or adjustment level. The first display flashes after one
second. This level is for specifying the input type, selecting the control
method, control period, setting direct/reverse action and alarm type. You can
move to the advanced function setting level or communications setting level
from this level. To return to the operation level, press the Level Key for at least
one second. To move to the communications setup level, press the Level Key
for less than one second.
The display will be blank “----” when you move from the initial setting level to
the operation level.
Advanced Function
Setting Level
• To enter this level, you must enter the password “-169” in the initial setting
level.
• You can move to the initial setting level only from this level.
• This level is for setting the MV limits, event input assignment, standby
sequence, alarm hysteresis, and other parameters.
Communications
Setting Level
To move to this level, press the Level Key for less than one second in the initial
setting level. When the communications settings are to used, set the communications conditions in this level. Communicating with a personal computer
(host computer) allows SPs to be read and written, and manipulated variables
to be monitored.
115
Section 6-4
Initial Setup Examples
6-4
Initial Setup Examples
On previous Controllers, the sensor input type, alarm type, and control period
were set on DIP switches. These hardware settings are now set using the
setup menus of the E5ZN-SDL. The Level and Mode Keys are used to switch
between setup menus, and the amount of time that you hold the keys down
determines which setup menu you move to.
Typical Usage Example
Changing parameters
in-t
0
Mode Key
cntl
pid
in-h
100
in-l
0
: indicates that there are more parameters.
Continue to press the Mode Key until the
desired parameter is reached.
Mode Key
Mode Key Changing numerals
°c
Use the Up and Down Keys
to change numeric data.
25
0
cntl
pid
Typical Example 1
Setup procedure
Input type:
Control method:
Alarm type:
Alarm value 1:
SP:
E5ZN unit number:
Channel No.:
0 (K thermocouple −200 to 1,300°C)
ON/OFF control
2 (upper limit)
20°C
100°C
3
1
Power ON
Power ON
Operation level
°c
01
PV/SP
25
0
Match UNIT/CH using
the UNIT and CH Keys.
Set unit
°c
31
25
0
Set channel No.
Initial setting level
Set input specifications
Set control specifications
Press Level Key for at
least three seconds.
Control stops.
Initial setting level
Check input
type.
Use the Up and
Down Keys to
select ON/OFF
control.
3u
in-t
0
31
cntl
onof
Input type
Mode Key In ON/
OFF
control
0
onof
In PID
control
pid
Alarm 1
type
2
Mode Key
Set alarm type
Check alarm
type.
31
alt1
2
Mode Key
Operation level
Set alarm values
Press Level Key for at
least one second.
Operation level
Press Up and
Down Keys to
set the SP to
100°C.
°c
Press Up and
Down Keys to
set alarm
value to 20°C.
°c
31
25
100
PV/SP
100
Mode Key
31
al-1
20
Alarm
value 1
20
Mode Key
Use the Up and
Down Keys to
select “RUN.”
31
r-5
run
During run
During stop
Mode Key
Start operation
116
Start operation
run
stop
Section 6-4
Initial Setup Examples
Typical Example 2
Input type:
4 (T thermocouple −200 to 400°C)
Control method:
PID control
Calculate PID constants by autotuning.
Alarm type:
2 (upper limit)
Alarm value 1:
30°C
SP:
150°C
E5ZN unit number: 1
Channel:
2
Power ON
Setup procedure
Power ON
Operation level
°c
01
°c
11
Set unit number
25
0
PV/SP
Use the UNIT Key to
match the unit number
25
0
Use the CH Key to
match the channel No.
Set channel No.
°c
12
25
0
Press Level Key for at least
three seconds.
Control stops.
Initial setting level
Initial setting level
Use the Up
and Down
Keys to set the
12
input type to 4.
Set input specifications
Set control specifications
method
Use the Up and
Down Keys to
check that the
mode is PID
control.
in-t
4
12
cntl
pid
12
cp
2
12
alt1
2
Input type
4
In ON/OFF onof
control
pid
In PID
control
Set alarm type
Check the
control
period.
Check alarm
type.
Heating control
period (unit:
seconds)
2
Set pid for
PID control.
The recommended
setting for relay
operation is 20 s and
for voltage/ transistor
output, 2 s.
Alarm 1 type 2
Press Level Key for at
least one second.
Operation level
Operation level
Press Up nd
Down Keys to
set the SP to
150°C.
Set alarm values
Press Up and
Down Keys to
set alarm
value to 30°C.
PV/SP
After AT execution
°c
25
Use the Up
and Down
Keys to select
“RUN.”
°c
12
°c
25
150
12
al-1
30
12
r-5
run
PV/SP
150
Alarm value 1 30
During run
run
During stop
stop
100
During AT execution
Adjustment level
AT execution
(when PID
control is
selected)
°c
25
100
While AT is being
executed, SP will flash
After AT execution
at
off
During AT execution
Start operation
at
on
Press Level Key for
less than 1 second.
Adjustment level
Execute
autotuning.
12
at
off
To execute AT on
To cancel AT
off
Press Level Key for
less than 1 second.
Select “ON:
execute AT” to
execute AT and
“OFF: stop AT” to
stop AT.
Start control after AT
completed.
117
Section 6-5
Using Copy Mode
6-5
6-5-1
Using Copy Mode
Parameter Copy Operations
Upload (Temperature
Controller to Setting
Display Unit)
UNIT
COPY
1,2,3...
CH
1. Press the COPY Key for at least one second to move to the copy mode.
2. Use the Up and Down Keys to select “UP” on the No. 2 display. Press the
UNIT Key to select the unit number for the upload.
Any unit number from 0 to F and “-” (All units) can be selected.
3. Press the Level Key for at least one second to start the upload.
Note a) “Up” will flash on the No. 2 display during the upload.
b) The mode will return automatically to the operation level when the upload
has been completed.
Download (Setting
Display Unit to
Temperature Controller)
UNIT
COPY
1,2,3...
CH
1. Press the COPY Key for at least one second to move to the copy mode.
2. Use the Up and Down Keys to select “DOWN.”
The possible selections are “UP” and “DOWN.”
3. Press the UNIT Key to select the unit number for the download.
Any unit number from 0 to F can be selected.
However, the unit number for any units without uploaded data will not be
displayed.
Also, the selection operation will not be possible if the uploaded information was uploaded from all units. The UNIT display will be “-”.
Note For example, to download setting data from unit number 1 to unit number 2,
change the unit number of unit number 2 from 2 to 1, and change the number
of unit number 1 to another unit number or disconnect the socket connected
to unit number 1. Be sure that there is only one Unit with the same Unit number on the network at any one time.
4. Press the Level Key for at least one second to start the download.
Note a) Control must be stopped to download data. The copy operation will not be
possible in RUN mode.
b) “Down” will flash on the No. 2 display during the download.
c) The mode will return automatically to the operation level when the download has been completed.
d) To download to all Temperature Controllers, use the same configuration
as when the data was uploaded. Downloading is not possible in the fol-
118
Section 6-5
Using Copy Mode
lowing circumstances. “Down” will not be displayed when download is not
possible.
• When a E5ZN has been added or deleted since the upload.
• When the same number of units are connected as when the upload
was executed, but when the unit numbers are different.
• When the platinum resistance thermometer/thermocouple type configuration is different.
6-5-2
Copying Parameters from Master to Slaves
This section describes how to copy parameters from a Master to Slaves, as
shown in the following diagram, in which unit number 1 is the Master, and unit
numbers 2 and 3 are the Slaves.
System Configuration
E5ZN E5ZN E5ZN
UNIT
COPY
E5ZN-SDL
CH
1
2
3
Master
Data uploaded to the E5ZN-SDL can be downloaded only to a Unit whose unit
number has been uploaded. Therefore, after copying the Master parameters,
change the unit number of the Unit where the data is to be downloaded to the
uploaded unit number (Master’s unit number), and then download the parameter data.
1,2,3...
1. Press the COPY Key for at least one second to move to copy mode.
UNIT
COPY
CH
2. Press the UNIT Key to select the unit number of the Master.
In this example, the Master is unit number 1, so select “1.”
UNIT
COPY
CH
119
Section 6-5
Using Copy Mode
3. Upload all the parameters from the Master.
In this example, all the parameters from unit number 1 will be uploaded to
the E5ZN-SDL.
Press the Level Key for at least one second to start the upload.
“UP” will flash on the display during the upload. The mode will return automatically to operating mode when the upload has been completed.
UNIT
COPY
CH
4. The unit number of the Unit to which the data is to be downloaded will
change to the uploaded unit number. When uploading has been completed, turn OFF the power and disconnect the Unit (unit number 1) that has
been uploaded from the socket or change the unit number to avoid using
the same unit number twice during the download.
In this example, change the Master unit number from 1 to 5, and change
the unit number of the Unit to which the data is to be downloaded from
number 2 to number 1. The system configuration will change to the configuration shown in the following diagram.
E5ZN E5ZN E5ZN
5
UNIT
COPY
1
3
CH
E5ZN-SDL
Master
Copy destination
5. Turn ON the power and press the COPY Key for at least one second to
move to copy mode.
UNIT
COPY
CH
6. Use the Up and Down Keys to select “DOWN” on the No. 2 display. Press
the UNIT Key to select unit number 1 for the download where data is to be
copied to.
(The lowest unit number that is being uploaded will be displayed in the
download unit number display. At initialization, no upload data exists, so
the unit number display is blank.)
UNIT
COPY
120
CH
Section 6-5
Using Copy Mode
7. Press the Level Key for at least one second to start the download.
“DOWN” will flash on the display during the download. The mode will return automatically to operating mode when the download has been completed.
UNIT
COPY
CH
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to continue copying the data.
The following example shows copying data to unit number 3.
Turn OFF the power and change unit number 1 back to unit number 2.
Change unit number 3, where the data is to be downloaded, to unit number
1. The system configuration is shown in the following diagram. Turn ON the
power and follow steps 4 to 7 to copy data to unit number 3.
E5ZN E5ZN E5ZN
5
UNIT
COPY
E5ZN-SDL
2
1
CH
Master
Copy destination
Copy source
9. After copying is completed, turn OFF the power and change the unit numbers. In this example, turn OFF the power and change unit number 5 to unit
number 1, and change unit number 1 to unit number 3.
121
Section 6-6
List of Parameters
6-6
List of Parameters
The following diagram shows the parameters that can be set from
the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit. Some data is not displayed as
it is protected or is subject to usage conditions. A password must
be entered for access to the advanced function setting level.
Communication
setting level
Communications
Data Length
Mode Key
The following display indicates that ch1
and ch2 have different parameter settings.
ch2:
Communications
Stop Bit
Level Key
for less than 1 second
Press the CH Button to switch
between the data for ch1 and ch2.
Mode Key
Communications
Parity
ch1:
CH
Mode Key
Note 1.
2.
Communications
Response
Wait Time
Indicates parameters that are displayed for pulse output models only.
Indicates parameters that are displayed for analog output models only.
Mode Key
Level Key for 1 second min.
Advanced function
setting level
Level Key
Initial setting level
Parameter
Initialize
Possible by
setting
password
(−169)
Mode Key
Mode Key
Scaling
Upper Limit
Auxiliary Output 1
Allocation
Advanced Function
Setting Level
Event Input
Allocation
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Input Type
Control Output 2
Allocation
Mode Key
Sensor Error Indicator
(See note 2.)
Number of
Multi-SP Uses
Level Key
Voltage Output
Type
(See note 2.)
Mode Key
Mode Key
Auxiliary Output 2
Allocation
Mode Key
Scaling
Lower Limit
To top of initial setting level
Mode Key
Mode Key
Multi-SP Uses
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
SP Ramp Set Value
Decimal Point
Auxiliary Output 3
Allocation
(See note 2.)
α
Mode Key
Mode Key
˚C/˚F Selection
Auxiliary Output 4
Allocation
(See note 2.)
MV Upper Limit
CH
Mode Key
Mode Key
Standby Sequence
Reset Method
Mode Key
Mode Key
Set Point
Upper Limit
Operation after
Power ON
MV Lower Limit
CH
Mode Key
Mode Key
Alarm 1 Open
for Alarm
Mode Key
Alarm 1 Hysteresis
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Alarm 2 Open
for Alarm
Mode Key
Alarm 2 Hysteresis
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Alarm 3 Open
for Alarm
Mode Key
Alarm 3 Hysteresis
Mode Key
CH
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
HBA Used
(See note 1.)
Mode Key
Heater Burnout
Latch
(See note 1.)
Mode Key
Heater Burnout
Hysteresis
(See note 1.)
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Control Output 1
Allocation
(See note 2.)
Mode Key
Return to top of advanced function setting level
Alarm 3 Type
Current Output
Type
Cold Junction
Compensation
Method
Mode Key
Alarm 2 Type
SUB4 Transfer
Output Lower Limit
(See note 2.)
Input Error Output
(See note 2.)
Mode Key
Alarm 1 Type
SUB4 Transfer
Output Upper Limit
(See note 2.)
Alarm 3 Latch
Mode Key
Direct/Reverse
Operation
SUB3 Transfer
Output Lower Limit
(See note 2.)
Alarm 2 Latch
Mode Key
Cooling Control
Period
SUB3 Transfer
Output Upper Limit
(See note 2.)
Alarm 1 Latch
Mode Key
Heating Control
Period
OUT2 Transfer
Output Lower Limit
(See note 2.)
Temperature Input
Shift Type
(See note 2.)
Mode Key
PID/OnOff
OUT2 Transfer
Output Upper Limit
(See note 2.)
Additional
Temperature Input
Shift Value Display
CH
Set Point
Lower Limit
OUT1 Transfer
Output Lower Limit
(See note 2.)
Additional PV Display
122
Mode Key
OUT1 Transfer
Output Upper Limit
(See note 2.)
Input Digital Filter
Mode Key
Section 6-6
List of Parameters
Protect Level
Control in progress
Copy Mode
Operation/Adjustment
Protection
Control stopped
Mode Key
Automatic return
or COPY Key for
1 second or less
Copy Key
1 second min.
Initial Setting/
Communications
Protection
Level + Mode Keys
3 seconds min.
Mode Key
Level + Mode Keys
1 second min.
Setting Change
Protection
Power ON
Mode Key
Level Key for less than 1 second
1 second min.
Operation level
Adjustment level
3 seconds min.
Level Key for less than 1 second
PV
AT Execute/Cancel
Mode Key
Mode Key
Cooling Coefficient
PV/SP
Mode Key
Mode Key
Mode Key
Dead Band
Multi-SP
(Set Point 0 to 1)
Mode Key
Manual Reset Value
Mode Key
Heater Current Value
Monitor
(See note 1.)
Mode Key
Heater Burnout Detection
(See note 1.)
Mode Key
Heating Hysteresis
Mode Key
Set Point 0
Mode Key
Cooling Hysteresis
RUN/STOP
Mode Key
Alarm Value 1
Heater Current Value
Monitor
(See note 1.)
Mode Key
Mode Key
Ramp SP Value
Monitor
Mode Key
Communications Writing
Mode Key
Set Point 1
Mode Key
Temperature Input Shift
To top of adjustment level
Mode Key
Mode Key
Upper Limit Temperature
Input Shift Value
Alarm Upper Limit
Value 1
Mode Key
Mode Key
Lower Limit Temperature
Input Shift Value
Alarm Lower Limit
Value 1
Mode Key
Mode Key
Proportional Band
Alarm Value 2
Mode Key
Mode Key
Integral Time
Alarm Upper Limit
Value 2
Mode Key
Mode Key
Derivative Time
Alarm Lower Limit
Value 2
Mode Key
Alarm Value 3
Mode Key
Mode Key
MV Monitor for Heating
Mode Key
MV Monitor for Cooling
Mode Key
To top of operation level
Note Indicates parameters that are displayed for pulse output models only.
123
SECTION 7
Parameters
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
Conventions Used in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protect Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Operation/Adjustment Protection (oapt) Initial Setting/
Communications Protection (icpt) Setting Change Protection (wtpt)
Operation Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2 PV/SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3 Multi-SP (SP 0 to 1) (m-sp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-4 Ramp SP Value Monitor (sp-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-5 Heater Current Value Monitor (ct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-6 RUN/STOP (r-s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-7 Alarm Value 1 (al-1) Alarm Value 2 (al-2) Alarm Value 3 (al-3)
7-3-8 Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 (al 1h)
Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 (al 1l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-9 Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 (al2h)
Alarm Lower Limit Alarm Value 2 (al2l). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-10 MV Monitor for Heating (o). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-11 MV Monitor for Cooling (c-o) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1 AT Execute/Cancel (at) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2 Communications Writing (cmwt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3 Heater Current Value Monitor (ct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-4 Heater Burnout Detection (hb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-5 SP 0 (sp-0) SP 1 (sp-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-6 Temperature Input Shift (ins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-7 Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Value (insh)
Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Value (insl). . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-8 Proportional Band (p) Integral Time (i) Derivative Time (d) . . . . .
7-4-9 Cooling Coefficient (c-sc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-10 Dead Band (c-db) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-11 Manual Reset Value (of-r) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-12 Heating Hysteresis (hys) Cooling Hysteresis (chys). . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Setting Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1 Input Type (in-t) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-2 Scaling Upper Limit (in-h) Scaling Lower Limit (in-l)
Decimal Point (dp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-3 °C/°F Selection (d-u) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-4 SP Upper Limit (sl-h) SP Lower Limit (sl-l) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-5 PID/OnOff (cntl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-6 Heating Control Period (cp) Cooling Control Period (c-cp). . . . . .
7-5-7 Direct/Reverse Operation (oreU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-8 Alarm 1 Type (alt1) Alarm 2 Type (alt2) Alarm 3 Type (alt3) .
7-5-9 Control Output 1 Allocation (out1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-10 Control Output 2 Allocation (out2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-11 Auxiliary Output 1 Allocation (sub1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-12 Auxiliary Output 2 Allocation (sub2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-13 Auxiliary Output 3 Allocation (sub3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-14 Auxiliary Output 4 Allocation (sub4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-15 Operation after Power ON (cont) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
128
128
129
129
129
130
130
130
131
131
132
133
133
134
135
135
135
135
136
137
137
138
139
140
141
141
142
143
143
144
144
145
145
146
146
147
147
148
148
149
149
150
150
125
7-6
7-7
126
7-5-16 Transfer Output Upper Limit (tr1h)/(tr2h)/(tr3h)/(tr4h)
Transfer Output Lower Limit (tr1l)/(tr2l)/(tr3l)/(tr4l) . . . . . .
7-5-17 Current Output Type (ot-1) Voltage Output Type (ot-2) . . . . . . . .
7-5-18 Sensor Error Indicator Used (sedu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Function Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1 Parameter Initialize (init) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-2 Number of Multi-SP Uses (eU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-3 Event Input Allocation (eU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-4 Multi-SP Uses (mspu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-5 SP Ramp Set Value (sprt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-6 Standby Sequence Reset Method (rest) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-7 Alarm 1 Open in Alarm (al1n) Alarm 2 Open in Alarm (al2n)
Alarm 3 Open in Alarm (al3n). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-8 Alarm 1 Hysteresis (alh1) Alarm 2 Hysteresis (alh2)
Alarm 3 Hysteresis (alh3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-9 HBA Used (hbu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-10 Heater Burnout Latch (hbl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-11 Heater Burnout Hysteresis (hbh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-12 α (alfa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-13 MV Upper Limit (ol-h) MV Lower Limit (ol-l). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-14 Input Digital Filter (inf). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-15 Additional PV Display (pUad) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-16 Additional Temperature Input Shift Value Display (isdp). . . . . . . .
7-6-17 Temperature Input Shift Type (istp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-18 Alarm 1 Latch (a1lt) Alarm 2 Latch (a2lt) Alarm 3 Latch (a3lt)
7-6-19 Input Error Output (sero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-20 Cold Junction Compensation Method (cjc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Setting Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-1 Communications Data Length (len). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-2 Communications Stop Bit (sbit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-3 Communications Parity (prty) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7-4 Communications Response Wait Time (sdwt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
152
153
154
154
154
154
155
155
156
157
158
159
159
159
160
160
161
162
162
162
163
164
164
166
166
166
166
167
Conventions Used in this Chapter
7-1
Section 7-1
Conventions Used in this Chapter
Headings
Function
Describes the functions of the parameter.
Communications
Describes the variable type and address specified in communications commands.
Settings
Describes the setting range and defaults of the parameter.
Monitoring
Describes the monitor values.
Example of Use
Describes procedures for the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit.
See Also
Describes related parameters and items.
Display Conditions for Related Parameters
The parameters are displayed in the display section of the E5ZN-SDL Setting
Display Unit only when the condition for use shown at the top of the section
describing the parameter are met. Protected parameters are not be displayed
regardless, although the parameters themselves will be enabled.
Order for Parameter Display
The parameters are displayed by level.
127
Section 7-2
Protect Level
7-2
Protect Level
7-2-1
Operation/Adjustment Protection (oapt)
Initial Setting/Communications Protection (icpt)
Setting Change Protection (wtpt)
Function
These parameters specify the range of parameters to be protected. The
shaded areas indicate the defaults.
Settings
Operation/Adjustment Protection
The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range
of protection.
Level
Set value
0
Operation
level
1
2
3
PV
PV/SP
♦
♦
♦
Other
♦
♦
×
×
♦
×
×
×
Adjustment level
♦: Can be displayed and changed
: Can be displayed
×: Cannot be displayed and move to other levels not possible
Parameter items are not protected when the set value is set to 0.
Initial Setting/Communications Protection
Moving to the “initial setting level,” “communications setting level” and
“advanced function setting level” can be prohibited.
Set value
Initial setting level
Communications
setting level
Advanced function
setting level
0
×
1
2
×
×
×
: Moving to other levels possible
×: Moving to other levels not possible
Setting Change Protection
Changes to setups by key operation can be prohibited.
Set value
OFF
ON
Description
Setup can be changed by key operation.
Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The protect level can be
changed.)
Communications
128
Setting
Operation/adjustment protection
Variable type
C1
Address
0000 or 0100
Initial setting/communications protection
Setting change protection
C1
C1
0001 or 0101
0002 or 0102
Section 7-3
Operation Level
7-3
Operation Level
7-3-1
PV
Condition: The “additional PV display” parameter must be set to ON.
Function
The PV is displayed on the No.1 display, and nothing is displayed (blank) on
the No. 2 display.
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
Address
C0
C0
0000
0100
Monitoring
PV
Monitoring range
Input range lower limit −10% FS to input range upper limit
+10%FS
Scaling lower limit −10% FS to scaling upper limit +10%FS
Unit
EU
The decimal point position is dependent on the selected sensor.
• Related Parameters
“Input type” (page 143)
“SP upper limit” “SP lower limit” (page 145)
See Also
7-3-2
PV/SP
Function
The PV is displayed on the No.1 display, and the SP is displayed on the No. 2
display.
PV
SP
Monitoring range
Input range lower limit −10%FS to input range upper limit
+10%FS
Scaling lower limit −10%FS to scaling upper limit +10%FS
Unit
EU
Monitoring range
SP lower limit to SP upper limit
Unit
EU
Communications
Monitor value/parameter
See Also
ch
Variable type
Address
PV
1
2
C0
C0
0000
0100
SP
1
2
C1
C1
0003
0103
Refer to the PV parameter.
129
Section 7-3
Operation Level
7-3-3
Multi-SP (SP 0 to 1) (m-sp)
Condition: The “multi-SP uses” parameter must be set to ON.
Function
Multi-SP allows you to set up to two SPs (SP0 to 1) in the adjustment level.
These can be switched between by operating the keys on the front panel or by
external input signals (event input allocation).
In the parameter, enter SPs 0 to 1. Default is 0.
Communications
Use the multi-SP operation commands. Refer to page 81 for information.
• If multi-SP cannot be selected using the event input, set the “No. of multiSP uses” parameter to 0 and the “multi-SP uses” parameter to ON. This
will enable SP selection.
• SP can be selected using the communications function also.
See Also
7-3-4
Ramp SP Value Monitor (sp-m)
Condition: The “SP ramp set value” parameter must not be set to 0.
Function
This parameter monitors the SP while the ramp function is being used.
The ramp function restricts the rate of change in the width of the SP.
The set value is displayed when “SP ramp set value” parameter is set.
When the SP is out of the preset ramp, the SP is matched to the SP set in the
“PV/SP” parameter.
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C0
C0
Address
0002
0102
Monitoring
Monitoring range
Unit
SP: SP lower limit to SP upper limit
• Related Parameters
“PV/SP” (operation level) (page 129)
“SP ramp set value” (advanced function setting level) (page 155)
“SP upper limit” “SP lower limit” (initial setting level) (page 145)
See Also
7-3-5
EU
Heater Current Value Monitor (ct)
Condition: Pulse output models only, and the “HBA used” parameter
must be set to “ON.”
This parameter measures the heater current value from the CT input used for
detecting heater burnout.
Function
Measures and displays the heater current value.
Communications
ch
130
Variable type
Address
1
C0
0003
2
C0
0103
Section 7-3
Operation Level
Monitoring
Monitoring range
Unit
00000000H to 00000226 H (0.0 to 55.0)
A
When the current exceeds 55.0A in the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit,
“ffff” is displayed.
• Related Parameters
“Heater burnout detection” (adjustment level) (page 136)
“Heater burnout use” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
See Also
7-3-6
RUN/STOP (r-s)
Condition: The RUN/STOP function must not be set for the event input.
Function
This parameter starts and stops operation.
Default is “STOP.”
Communications
Use the “RUN/STOP” operation command. Refer to page 80 for information.
Example of Use
When run is selected, control is executed. When stop is selected, control is
stopped. When control is stopped, the STOP indicator will be lit.
• This parameter is not displayed when the RUN/STOP function is set to
the event input.
• Related Parameters
“Event input allocation” (advanced function setting level) (page 154)
See Also
7-3-7
Alarm Value 1 (al-1)
Alarm Value 2 (al-2)
Alarm Value 3 (al-3)
Condition: The alarm type must not be set to no alarm or upper and lower
limit alarm (alarms 1 and 2 only).
These parameters set the input value “X” in the alarm.
Function
• These parameters are used to set the alarm values for alarm outputs 1 to
3.
• During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the
currently selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on the
“decimal point” parameter setting.
Communications
Setting
ch
Variable type
Address
Alarm value 1
1
2
C1
C1
0004
0104
Alarm value 2
1
2
C1
C1
0007
0107
Alarm value 3
1
2
C1
C1
000A
010A
131
Section 7-3
Operation Level
Settings
Setting range
Unit
FFFFF831H to 00000270FH (−1999 to 9999)
EU
Default
0
The alarm type must be set to other than no alarm or upper and lower limit
alarm (alarms 1 and 2 only).
• Related Parameters
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
“Scaling upper limit” “Scaling lower limit” “Decimal point” (initial setting
level) (page 144)
“Alarm 1 type” “Alarm 2 type” “Alarm 3 type” (initial setting level)
(page 147)
“Alarm 1 open in alarm” “Alarm 2 open in alarm” “Alarm 3 open in alarm”
(advanced function setting level) (page 157) “Alarm 1 hysteresis” “Alarm 2
hysteresis” “Alarm 3 hysteresis” (advanced function setting level)
(page 158)
“Standby sequence reset method” (advanced function setting level)
(page 156)
See Also
7-3-8
Alarm Upper Limit Value 1 (al 1h)
Alarm Lower Limit Value 1 (al 1l)
Condition: Alarm 1 type must be set to upper and lower limits, upper and
lower limit range, or upper and lower limit with standby sequence.
These parameters independently set the upper and lower limit alarm values
when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for alarm 1
type.
Function
• These parameters set the upper and lower limits of alarm 1.
• During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the
currently selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on the
“decimal point” parameter setting.
Communications
Setting
Alarm upper limit value 1
Alarm lower limit alarm
value 1
1
ch
Variable type
C1
Address
0005
2
1
C1
C1
0105
0006
2
C1
0106
Settings
Setting range
FFFFF831H to 00000270FH (−1999 to 9999)
See Also
132
Unit
EU
Default
0
• Related Parameters
“Alarm 1 type” (initial setting level) (page 147)
“Standby sequence reset method” (advanced function setting level)
(page 156)
“Alarm 1 open in alarm” (advanced function setting level) (page 157)
“Alarm 1 hysteresis” (advanced function setting level) (page 158)
Section 7-3
Operation Level
7-3-9
Alarm Upper Limit Value 2 (al2h)
Alarm Lower Limit Alarm Value 2 (al2l)
Condition: Alarm 2 type must be set to upper and lower limits, upper and
lower limit range, or upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence.
These parameters independently set the upper and lower limit alarm values
when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for alarm 2
type.
• These parameters set the upper and lower limits of alarm 2.
• The decimal point position is dependent on the currently selected sensor.
For analog input, it is dependent on the “decimal point position” setting.
Function
Communications
Setting
Alarm upper limit value 2
1
ch
Variable type
C1
Address
0008
Alarm lower limit value 2
2
1
C1
C1
0108
0009
2
C1
0109
Settings
Setting range
FFFFF831H to 00000270FH (−1999 to 9999)
Unit
EU
Default
0
• Related Parameters
“Input type” “Alarm 2 type” (initial setting level) (page 147)
“Standby sequence reset method” (advanced function setting level)
(page 156)
“Alarm 2 open in alarm” (advanced function setting level) (page 157)
“Alarm 2 hysteresis” (advanced function setting level) (page 158)
See Also
7-3-10 MV Monitor for Heating (o)
Function
During standard control, the MV is monitored, and during heating/cooling control, the MV on the heating side is monitored.
Communications
ch
Variable type
Address
1
C0
0004
2
C0
0104
Monitoring
Control
Standard
Monitoring range
FFFFFFCEH to 0000041AH (−5.0 to 105.0)
Unit
%
Heating and cooling
00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
%
133
Section 7-3
Operation Level
7-3-11 MV Monitor for Cooling (c-o)
The control must be heating and cooling control.
This parameter is for monitoring the MV on the cooling side during operation.
Function
During heating and cooling control, the MV on the cooling side is monitored.
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C0
C0
Address
0005
0105
Monitoring
Control
Heating and cooling
See Also
134
Monitoring range
00000000H to 0000041AH (0.0 to 105.0)
Unit
%
• Related Parameters
“Control output 1 allocation,” “Control output 2 allocation” (initial setting
level) (page 147) “Auxiliary output 1 allocation,” “Auxiliary output 2 allocation” (initial setting level) (page 148)
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
7-4
Adjustment Level
7-4-1
AT Execute/Cancel (at)
Condition: Operation in automatic mode with 2-PID control.
This parameter executes autotuning.
Function
When you execute AT, the optimum PID parameters “proportional band,” “integral time,” and “derivative time” for the SP during program execution are automatically set by changing the MV to calculate the characteristics of the control
target.
Communications
Use the “AT execute/cancel” operation command. Refer to page 81 for information.
Example of Use
• Normally, this parameter is set to “off”. When you press the Up Key, the
parameter is turned ON and AT is executed.
AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON/OFF control.
• When AT execution ends, the parameter setting automatically returns to
“off.”
• The SP flashes if “PV/SP” is monitored during AT.
• Channel settings cannot be changed during AT.
See Also
• Related Parameters
“Proportional band” “Integral time” “Derivative time” (adjustment level)
(page 139)
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
7-4-2
Communications Writing (cmwt)
Function
This parameter enables/disables writing of parameters to the E5ZN from the
host (e.g., personal computer) by communications.
Communications
Use the “communications writing” operation command. Refer to page 80 for
information.
Example of Use
Set this parameter to “on” to enable writing and to “off” to disable writing.
See Also
7-4-3
• Related Parameters
“Communication unit No.” “Baud rate” (setting switch) (page 3)
“Data bit” “Stop bit” (communications setting level) (page 166) “Parity”
“Communications response wait time” (communications setting level)
(page 167)
Heater Current Value Monitor (ct)
Condition: The “HBA used” parameter for pulse output models must be
set to “ON”.
This parameter measures the current value of the heater from current transformer (CT) input to detect heater burnout.
Function
This parameter measures and displays the current value of the heater.
135
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C0
C0
Address
0003
0103
Monitoring
Monitoring range
Unit
00000000H to 00000226 H (0.0 to 55.0)
A
“ffff” is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded in the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display
Unit.
• Related Parameters
“Heater burnout detection” (adjustment level) (page 136)
“HBA used” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
See Also
7-4-4
Heater Burnout Detection (hb)
Condition: The “HBA used” parameter for pulse output models must be
set to “ON”.
This parameter sets the current value for the heater burnout alarm output to
become active.
• This parameter outputs the heater burnout alarm when the heater current
value falls below this parameter setting.
• When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm will be OFF. When the
set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm will be ON.
Function
Communications
ch
Variable type
Address
1
C1
000C
2
C1
010C
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 000001F4H (0.0 to 50.0)
See Also
136
Unit
A
Default
0.0
• Related Parameters
“HBA used” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
“Heater current value monitor” (operation or adjustment level) (page 135)
“Heater burnout latch” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
“Heater burnout hysteresis” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
7-4-5
SP 0 (sp-0)
SP 1 (sp-1)
Condition: The “number of multi-SP uses” parameter must be set to
either 1 or 2, and the “multi-SP uses” parameter must be set to ON.
These parameters set the SPs when the multi-SP function is used.
Function
The values set in these parameters can be selected.
• When the SP has been changed, the set value of these parameters currently set by multi-SP is linked and changed.
• The decimal point position is dependent on the selected sensor.
During analog input, the decimal point position is dependent on the setting of
the “decimal point position” parameter.
Communications
SP 0
Setting
1
ch
Variable type
C1
Address
000D
SP 1
2
1
C1
C1
010D
000E
2
C1
010E
Settings
Setting range
Lower SP limit to upper SP limit
Default
0
• Related Parameters
“Number of multi-SP uses” (advanced function setting level) (page 154)
“Event input allocation” “Multi-SP uses” (advanced function setting level)
(page 154)
“PV/SP” (operation level) (page 129)
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
See Also
7-4-6
Unit
EU
Temperature Input Shift (ins)
Condition: Refer to the following table for details.
Sometimes an error between the SP and the actual temperature occurs. To
offset this, a value obtained by adding an input shift value to the input is displayed as the measurement value and used for control.
Conditions of Use
Setting
Temperature input
shift value
Input type
Temperature input
shift type
Temperature input shift value
Analog output models
Pulse output models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
ON
ON
Platinum-resistance thermometer or thermocouple
(analog input and infrared temperature sensors not
included)
One-point shift
-
137
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
Function
The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (one-point shift). If the input
shift value is set to −1.0°C, the SP is controlled to a value obtained by
subtracting 1.0°C from the actual temperature.
Communications
ch
Variable type
Address
1
C1
000F
2
C1
010F
Settings
Setting range
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
Default
0.0
• Related Parameter
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
See Also
7-4-7
Unit
°C or °F
Upper Limit Temperature Input Shift Value (insh)
Lower Limit Temperature Input Shift Value (insl)
Condition: Refer to the following table for details.
These parameters allow the input range to be shifted both at the upper and
lower limits (two-point shift) (as opposed to the “temperature input shift”
parameter, where the entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (one-point
shift)). A two-point shift enables more accurate offset of the input range
compared with a one-point shift when the input shift values at the upper and
lower limits differ.
Conditions of Use
Setting
Upper limit temperature input shift value/
Lower limit temperature input shift value
Additional
temperature input
shift value display
Input type
ON
Temperature input
shift type
-
Infrared temperature sensor
Platinum-resistance
thermometer, thermocouple
(See note.)
Two-point shift
Note Two-point shift can be used with platinum-resistance thermometers and
thermocouples for upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only.
Function
This parameter sets input shift values for each of the upper and lower limits
(two-point shift) of the input range.
Communications
Setting
138
ch
Variable type
Address
Upper limit temperature
input shift value
1
2
C1
C1
0010
0110
Lower limit temperature
input shift value
1
2
C1
C1
0011
0111
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
Settings
Setting range
Unit
°C or °F
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
Related Parameter
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
See Also
7-4-8
Default
0.0
Proportional Band (p)
Integral Time (i)
Derivative Time (d)
Condition: The control must be 2-PID control.
These parameters set the PID constants for control. The PID can be automatically set by executing autotuning.
Function
Proportional action:P refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the
deviation.
Integral action:
I gives a control action that is proportional to the time integral of the control error. With proportional control, there is
normally an offset (control error). So, proportional action
is used in combination with integral action. As time
passes, this control error disappears, and the SP comes
to agree with the control temperature (PV).
Derivative action: D gives a control action that is proportional to the time
derivative of the control error. As proportional control and
integral control correct for errors in the control result, the
control system will be late in responding to sudden
changes in temperature. Derivative action enables control
that is proportional to a predicted process output to correct for future error.
Communications
Setting
Proportional band
1
ch
Variable type
C1
Address
0012
Integral time
2
1
C1
C1
0112
0013
Derivative time
2
1
C1
C1
0113
0014
2
C1
0114
Settings
See Also
Setting
Proportional band
Setting range
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
EU
Unit
Default
8.0
Integral time
Derivative time
00000000H to 00000F9FH (0 to 3999)
00000000H to 00000F9FH (0 to 3999)
Second
Second
233
40
• Related Parameters
“AT execute/cancel” (adjustment level) (page 135)
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
139
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
7-4-9
Cooling Coefficient (c-sc)
Condition: The control must be either heating and cooling control or 2PID control.
If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target differ enough to
prevent satisfactory control characteristics from being obtained by the same
PID parameters, adjust the proportional band (P) on the cooling side by adding the cooling coefficient to control cooling.
Function
In heating and cooling control, cooling side P is calculated by the following formula to set the cooling coefficient:
Cooling side P = Cooling coefficient × P (proportional operation)
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C1
C1
Address
0015
0115
Settings
Setting range
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.01 to 99.99)
See Also
140
• Related Parameter
“Proportional band” (adjustment level) (page 139)
Unit
None
Default
1.00
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
7-4-10 Dead Band (c-db)
Condition: The control system must be heating and cooling control.
This parameter sets the output dead band width in a heating and cooling control system. A negative setting sets an overlap band.
Function
This parameter sets an area in which the control output is 0 centering around
the SP in a heating and cooling control system.
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C1
C1
Address
0016
0116
Settings
Setting range
Unit
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH (−199.9 to 999.9)
EU
Default
0.0
7-4-11 Manual Reset Value (of-r)
Condition: The control must be standard control or 2-PID control. The
“integral time” parameter must be set to 0.
Function
This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during
stabilization of P or PD control.
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C1
C1
Address
0017
0117
Settings
Monitoring range
00000000H to 000003E8H (0.0 to 100.0)
See Also
Unit
%
Default
50.0
• Related Parameters
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
“Integral time” (adjustment level) (page 139)
141
Section 7-4
Adjustment Level
7-4-12 Heating Hysteresis (hys)
Cooling Hysteresis (chys)
Condition: The control must be ON/OFF control.
These parameters set the hysteresis for ensuring stable operation at ON/OFF
switching.
Function
• In a standard control, use the “heating hysteresis” parameter. The “cooling hysteresis” parameter cannot be used.
• In a heating and cooling control, the hysteresis can be set independently
for heating and cooling. Use the “heating hysteresis” parameter to set the
heating side hysteresis, and use the “cooling hysteresis” parameter to set
the cooling side hysteresis.
Communications
Setting
heating hysteresis
1
ch
Variable type
C1
Address
0018
Cooling hysteresis
2
1
C1
C1
0118
0019
2
C1
0119
Settings
Setting range
00000001H to 0000270FH (0.1 to 999.9)
See Also
142
• Related Parameter
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
Unit
EU
Default
1.0
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
7-5
Initial Setting Level
7-5-1
Input Type (in-t)
• This parameter sets the sensor type using a corresponding code.
• When this parameter is changed, the SP limiter is changed to the default.
If the SP limits must be changed, set the “SP upper limit” and “SP lower
limit” parameters.
Function
Communications
ch
Shared
Settings
See Also
Address
0000 or 0100
Set the code according to the following table. Shaded ranges indicate default
settings.
Sensor
Input type
Name
Platinum
Platinum
Pt100
resistance
resistance
thermometer thermometer
Thermocouple input
type
Variable type
C3
Set value
00000000H (0)
Input temperature range
−200 to 850 (°C) to −300 to 1,500 (°F)
00000001H (1)
00000002H (2)
−199.9 to 500.0 (°C) to −199.9 to 900.0 (°F)
0.0 to 100.0 (°C) to 0.0 to 210.0 (°F)
JPt100
00000003H (3)
00000004H (4)
−199.9 to 500.0 (°C) to −199.9 to 900.0 (°F)
0.0 to 100.0 (°C) to 0.0 to 210.0 (°F)
K
00000000H (0)
00000001H (1)
−200 to 1,300 (°C) to −300 to 2,300 (°F)
−20.0 to 500.0 (°C) to 0.0 to 900.0 (°F)
J
00000002H (2)
00000003H (3)
−100 to 850 (°C) to −100 to 1,500 (°F)
−20.0 to 400.0 (°C) to 0.0 to 750.0 (°F)
T
00000004H (4)
00000011H (17)
−200 to 400 (°C) to −300 to 700 (°F)
−199.9 to 400.0 (°C) to −199.9 to 700.0 (°F)
E
L
00000005H (5)
00000006H (6)
0 to 600 (°C) to 0 to 1100 (°F)
−100 to 850 (°C) to −100 to 1,500 (°F)
U
00000007H (7)
00000012H (18)
−200 to 400 (°C) to −300 to 700 (°F)
−199.9 to 400.0 (°C) to −199.9 to 700.0 (°F)
N
R
00000008H (8)
00000009H (9)
−200 to 1,300 (°C) to −300 to 2,300 (°F)
0 to 1,700 (°C) to 0 to 3,000 (°F)
S
B
0000000AH (10)
0000000BH (11)
0 to 1,700 (°C) to 0 to 3,000 (°F)
100 to 1,800 (°C) to 300 to 3,200 (°F)
Infrared tem- K10 to 70°C
perature
K60 to 120°C
sensor
K115 to 165°C
ES1A
K160 to 260°C
0000000CH (12)
0000000DH (13)
0 to 90 (°C) to 0 to 190 (°F)
0 to 120 (°C) to 0 to 240 (°F)
0000000EH (14)
0000000FH (15)
0 to 165 (°C) to 0 to 320 (°F)
0 to 260 (°C) to 0 to 500 (°F)
Analog input 0 to 50 mV
00000010H (16)
One of following ranges depending on the
results of scaling:
−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9,
Thermocouple
• Related Parameters
“°C/°F selection” (initial setting level) (page 144) “SP upper limit” “SP
lower limit” (initial setting level) (page 145)
143
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
7-5-2
Scaling Upper Limit (in-h)
Scaling Lower Limit (in-l)
Decimal Point (dp)
Condition: The input type must be set to analog input.
• These parameters can be used when a voltage input is selected as the
input type.
• When a voltage input is selected as the input type, scaling is performed.
Set the upper limit in the “scaling upper limit” parameter and the lower
limit in the “scaling lower limit” parameter.
• The “decimal point” parameter specifies the decimal point position of
parameters (e.g., SP) whose unit is set to EU.
Function
Communications
Setting
Scaling upper limit
1
ch
Variable type
C3
Address
0001
Scaling lower limit
2
1
C3
C3
0101
0002
Decimal point position
2
1
C3
C3
0102
0003
2
C3
0103
Settings
Setting
Unit
Default
-
100
Scaling lower limit FFFFF831H to scaling upper limit −1
(−1999 to scaling upper limit −1)
-
0
Decimal point
position
-
0
00000000H to 00000001H (0 t0 1)
• Related Parameter
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
See Also
7-5-3
Settings range
Scaling upper limit Scaling lower limit +1 to 00000270FH
(Scaling lower limit +1 to 9,999)
°C/°F Selection (d-u)
Condition: The input type must be set to temperature input.
Function
• Set the temperature input unit to either °C or °F.
• The temperature input unit must be the same for both ch1 and ch2.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0004 or 0104
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: °C (c)
1: °F (f)
144
Unit
-
Default
0: °C
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
• Related Parameter
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
See Also
7-5-4
SP Upper Limit (sl-h)
SP Lower Limit (sl-l)
• These parameters set the upper and lower limits for the SP setting. The
SP can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set
values in the “SP upper limit” and “SP lower limit” parameters. If existing
SP settings are out of the range, they will be changed to either the upper
or lower limits (which-ever is closest).
• When the temperature input type and temperature unit are changed, the
SP upper limit and SP lower limit will be changed to the upper and lower
limits of the sensor.
• During temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the
currently selected sensor. During analog input, it is dependent on the
“decimal point” parameter setting.
Function
Communications
Setting
ch
Variable type
Address
SP upper limit
1
2
C3
C3
0005
0105
SP lower limit
1
2
C3
C3
0006
0106
Settings
Setting
SP upper
limit
SP lower
limit
Unit
Default
Temperature: SP lower limit +1 to sensor Depends
range upper limit
on °C/°F
selection
Input range
upper limit
Analog: SP lower limit + 1 to scaling
upper limit
Scaling upper
limit
EU
Temperature: Sensor range lower limit to Depends
SP upper limit −1
on °C/°F
selection
Input range
lower limit
Analog: Scaling lower limit to SP upper
limit − 1
Scaling lower
limit
EU
• Related Parameters
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143) “°C/°F selection” (initial setting
level) (page 144)
See Also
7-5-5
Settings range
PID/OnOff (cntl)
• This parameter selects 2-PID control or ON/OFF control as the control
system.
• The AT tuning function can be used in 2-PID control.
Function
Communications
ch
Variable type
Address
1
C3
0007
2
C3
0107
145
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Settings
Settings range
Unit
00000000H to00000001H
0: ON/OFF (onof)
1: 2-PID (pid)
Default
1: 2-PID
• Related Parameters
“Manual reset” “Heating hysteresis” “Cooling hysteresis” (adjustment
level) (page 141)
See Also
7-5-6
-
Heating Control Period (cp)
Cooling Control Period (c-cp)
Condition: The control must be set to 2-PID control when the cooling side
control period is cooling/heating control.
• These parameters set the control periods. Set the control periods taking
the control characteristics and the electrical life expectancy of the relay
into consideration.
• In a standard control system, use the “heating control period” parameter.
• In a heating and cooling control system, the control period can be set
independently for heating and cooling.
Function
Communications
Setting
Heating control period
Cooling control period
ch
1
Variable type
C3
Address
0008
2
1
C3
C3
0108
0009
2
C3
0109
Settings
Setting
Heating control
period
Settings range
00000001H to 00000063H (1 to 99)
Unit
Second
Default
2
Cooling control
period
00000001H to 00000063H (1 to 99)
Second
2
• Related Parameter
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
See Also
7-5-7
Direct/Reverse Operation (oreU)
Function
Direct operation increases the MV when the PV increases. Alternatively,
reverse operation increases the manipulated variable when the PV
decreases.
Communications
ch
146
Variable type
Address
1
C3
000A
2
C3
010A
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Settings
Settings range
Unit
00000000H to00000001H
0: Reverse operation (or-r)
1: Direct operation (or-d)
0: Reverse
operation
3-4 Setting Output Specifications (page 25)
See Also
7-5-8
Default
-
Alarm 1 Type (alt1)
Alarm 2 Type (alt2)
Alarm 3 Type (alt3)
Function
These parameters select alarm type for alarms 1, 2, or 3
Communications
Setting
ch
Variable type
Address
Alarm 1 type
1
2
C3
C3
000B
010B
Alarm 2 type
1
2
C3
C3
000C
010C
Alarm 3 type
1
2
C3
C3
000D
010D
Settings
Setting
Alarm 1 type
Alarm 2 type
Alarm 3 type
See Also
7-5-9
Function
Settings range
00000000H (0): No alarm function
00000001H (1): Upper and lower limit alarm
00000002H (2): Upper limit alarm
00000003H (3): Lower limit alarm
00000004H (4): Upper and lower limit range alarm
00000005H (5): Upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence
00000006H (6): Upper limit alarm with standby sequence
00000007H (7): Lower limit alarm with standby sequence
00000008H (8): Absolute value upper limit alarm
00000009H (9): Absolute value lower limit alarm
0000000AH (10): Absolute value upper limit alarm with standby sequence
0000000BH (11): Absolute value lower limit alarm with standby sequence
Unit
-
Default
2: Upper limit
alarm
• Related Parameters
“Alarm 1 to 3 value” (operation level) (page 131)
“Upper limit alarm value 1” “Lower limit alarm value 1” (operation level)
(page 132) “Upper limit alarm value 2” “Lower limit alarm value 2” (operation level) (page 133)
“Standby sequence reset” (advanced function setting level) (page 156)
“Alarm 1 to 3 open in alarm” (advanced function setting level) (page 157)
“Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis” (advanced function setting level) (page 158)
“Alarm 1 to 3 latch” (advanced function setting level) (page 163)
Control Output 1 Allocation (out1)
This function assigns the data to be output to the control output 1 terminals
(terminals 7 and 8.)
147
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Communications
ch
Variable type
Shared
C3
Address
000E or 010E
Settings
Settings range
Analog output models
[email protected]@-FLK
00000000H (0)
ch1
Heating control output
Default
Pulse output models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
Heating control output
ch1
00000001H (1)
00000002H (2)
Cooling control output
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Cooling control output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
00000003H (3)
00000004H (4)
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
00000005H (5)
00000006H (6)
ch2
Heating control output
Cooling control output
ch2
Heating control output
Cooling control output
00000007H (7)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
00000008H (8)
00000009H (9)
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
0000000AH (10)
0000000BH (11)
ch1
0000000CH (12)
0000000DH (13)
0000000EH (14)
0000000FH (15)
0: Heating control output for ch1
SP transfer output
Ramp SP transfer output
PV transfer output
Heating MV transfer output
ch2
Cooling MV transfer output
SP transfer output
00000010H (16)
00000011H (17)
Ramp SP transfer output
PV transfer output
00000012H (18)
00000013H (19)
Heating MV transfer output
Cooling MV transfer output
7-5-10 Control Output 2 Allocation (out2)
Function
This parameter allocates the data to be output to the control output 2 terminals (terminals 1 and 2.)
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
000F or 010F
Settings
Settings range
Refer to the table of setting ranges for control output 1 allocation.
Unit
-
Default
5: ch2
heating
control
output
7-5-11 Auxiliary Output 1 Allocation (sub1)
Function
148
This parameter allocates the data to be output to the auxiliary output 1 terminals (terminals 13 and 15.)
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Communications
ch
Variable type
Shared
C3
Address
0010 or 0110
Settings
Settings range
Analog output models
[email protected]@-FLK
00000000H (0)
ch1
Heating control output
ch1
Default
Pulse output models
[email protected]@-FLK
[email protected]@-FLK
Heating control output
00000001H (1)
00000002H (2)
Cooling control output
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Cooling control output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
00000003H (3)
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 2 output
00000004H (4)
00000005H (5)
Alarm 3 output
Heating control output
Alarm 3 output
Heating control output
ch2
ch2
00000006H (6)
00000007H (7)
Cooling control output
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm
OR output
Cooling control output
Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output
00000008H (8)
00000009H (9)
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
Analog output
models:
2: Alarm 1 and
sensor error
alarm OR output
for ch1
Pulse output
models:
2: Alarm 1 and
HB alarm OR
output for ch1
7-5-12 Auxiliary Output 2 Allocation (sub2)
Function
This parameter allocates the data to be output to the auxiliary output 2 terminals (terminals 14 and 15.)
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0011 or 0111
Settings
Setting range
Default
Refer to the table of setting Analog output models:
ranges for auxiliary output 7: Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output for ch2
1 allocation.
Pulse output models:
7: Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2
7-5-13 Auxiliary Output 3 Allocation (sub3)
Condition: Analog output models only
Function
This parameter allocates the data to be output to the auxiliary output 3 terminals (terminals 16 and 17.)
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
002F or 012F
149
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Settings
Settings range
00000000H (0)
00000001H (1)
ch1
Default
Heating control output
Cooling control output
12: PV transfer
output for ch1
00000002H (2)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR
output
00000003H (3)
00000004H (4)
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
00000005H (5)
00000006H (6)
ch2
Heating control output
Cooling control output
00000007H (7)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR
output
00000008H (8)
00000009H (9)
Alarm 2 output
Alarm 3 output
0000000AH (10)
0000000BH (11)
ch1
0000000CH (12)
0000000DH (13)
0000000EH (14)
0000000FH (15)
SP transfer output
Ramp SP transfer output
PV transfer output
Heating MV transfer output
ch2
Cooling MV transfer output
SP transfer output
00000010H (16)
00000011H (17)
Ramp SP transfer output
PV transfer output
00000012H (18)
00000013H (19)
Heating MV transfer output
Cooling MV transfer output
7-5-14 Auxiliary Output 4 Allocation (sub4)
Condition: Analog output models only
Function
This parameter allocates the data to be output to the auxiliary output 4 terminals (terminals 16 and 18.)
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0030 or 0130
Settings
Setting range
Default
Refer to the table of setting 17: PV transfer output for ch2
ranges for auxiliary output 3
allocation.
7-5-15 Operation after Power ON (cont)
Function
150
• This parameter selects either “stop” or “continue” for the E5ZN operation
after the power has been turned ON.
• The operation after a software reset or when moving from initial setting
level to operation level depends on the “stop” or “continue” selection
made using this parameter.
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
Address
C3
0012 or 0112
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: Stop (no)
1: Continue (yes)
See Also
Unit
-
Default
0: Stop
3-10 Starting and Stopping Control (page 38)
7-5-16 Transfer Output Upper Limit (tr1h)/(tr2h)/(tr3h)/(tr4h)
Transfer Output Lower Limit (tr1l)/(tr2l)/(tr3l)/(tr4l)
Condition: The transfer output must be allocated in the control outputs
or auxiliary outputs for an analog output model.
Function
• This parameter sets the transfer output upper and lower limits used for
scaling when transfer output is allocated for control and auxiliary output.
• When SP transfer output, ramp SP transfer output, or PV transfer output
are allocated, the following parameters can be changed to force the transfer output upper and lower limits to change to the limits determined for
each parameter.
Input type, scaling upper limit, scaling lower limit, SP upper limit,
SP lower limit, temperature unit, and decimal point
• When cooling control output is not allocated for output, and cooling MV
transfer output is allocated, the output will always be 0%.
• When transfer output is not allocated, the settings can still be changed
and read.
Communications
Parameter
OUT1 transfer output upper limit
OUT1 transfer output lower limit
OUT2 transfer output upper limit
OUT2 transfer output lower limit
Display
ch
Variable type
Address
tr1h
Shared
C3
0031 or 0131
tr1l
Shared
C3
0032 or 0132
tr2h
Shared
C3
0033 or 0133
tr2l
Shared
C3
0034 or 0134
SUB3 transfer out- tr3h
put upper limit
Shared
C3
0035 or 0135
SUB3 transfer out- tr3l
put lower limit
Shared
C3
0036 or 0136
SUB4 transfer out- tr4h
put upper limit
SUB4 transfer out- tr4l
put lower limit
Shared
C3
0037 or 0137
Shared
C3
0038 or 0138
151
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
Settings
Setting range
Unit
FFFFF831H to 0000270FH
SP transfer output, ramp SP transfer output, and PV transfer
output: −1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to 999.9
Heating MV transfer output, cooling MV transfer output: -1999
to 9999
See Also
-
Default
-
• Related Parameters
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
“Control output 1 allocation,” “Control output 2 allocation” (initial setting
level) (page 148)
“Auxiliary output 3 allocation,” “Auxiliary output 4 allocation” (initial setting
level) (page 149)
■ Setting Example 1: SP Transfer Output
Change the input type from the default to 1 (thermocouple: K, −20 to 500°C)
to automatically change the transfer output upper limit to 500.0, and the transfer output lower limit to −20.0. By setting the SP limit to 0.0 to 100.0°C, the
transfer output upper limit will change to 100.0 and the transfer output lower
limit will change to 0.0.
■ Setting Example 2: PV Transfer Output
The sensor input temperature range will be set to the default transfer output
upper and lower limits. For example, if the input type is set to 0 (thermocouple:
K, −200 to 1300°C), the transfer output upper limit will be set to 1,300 and the
transfer output lower limit will be set to −200.
7-5-17 Current Output Type (ot-1)
Voltage Output Type (ot-2)
Condition: Analog output models only
Function
This parameter sets current output as the output type for control output 1 and
control output 2, and sets voltage output as the output type for auxiliary output
3 and auxiliary output 4.
Communications
Parameter
Current output type Shared
Voltage output type Shared
ch
Variable type
C3
C3
Address
0039 or 0139
003A or 013A
Settings
Parameter
152
Data range
Default
Current output type
00000000H(0): 4 to 20 mA
00000001H(1): 0 to 20 mA
0: 4 to 20 mA
Voltage output type
00000000H(0): 1 to 5 V
00000001H(1): 0 to 5 V
0: 1 to 5 V
Section 7-5
Initial Setting Level
7-5-18 Sensor Error Indicator Used (sedu)
Condition:
Upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only
Function
• This parameter sets whether the error indicator (ERROR) on the front
panel of the E5ZN will light or not light when a sensor error is detected.
• For the initial setting, when an input channel sensor is not connected during operation, a sensor error is detected and the ERROR indicator will
light. The parameter can be set to always not light, so that the ERROR
indicator will not light when a sensor error is detected.
• This parameter is supported by upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
003B or 013B
Settings
Setting range
00000000H(0): Indicator always not lit.
00000001H(1): Sensor error indicator lit (ch1 only)
00000002H(2): Sensor error indicator lit (ch2 only)
00000003H(3): Sensor error indicator lit (ch1 or ch2)
Default
3: Sensor error indicator lit
(ch1 or ch2)
153
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
7-6-1
Parameter Initialize (init)
Function
This parameter initializes all settings to their defaults.
Communications
Use the “parameter initialize” operation command. Refer to page 86 for information.
Example of Use
ON (on): Initializes all parameters.
OFF (off): Turns OFF the E5ZN after returning parameter settings to their
defaults.
7-6-2
Number of Multi-SP Uses (eU-m)
• This parameter sets the multi-SP SPs that are used for the event input.
• When the number of multi-SP uses setting has been changed, the setting
must enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power
again.
Function
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0017 or 0117
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: No multi-SP
1: SP0/1
7-6-3
Unit
-
Default
0: No
multi-SP
Event Input Allocation (eU)
Condition: The number of multi-SP uses must be set to “0.”
Function
• By selecting this parameter to “RUN/STOP,” an external signal can be
used to control RUN/STOP status.
• Settings are not possible when the “number of multi-SP uses” parameter
is set to 1 (2: multi-SP).
• Setting changes to event input allocations must be enabled by executing
a software reset or turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
154
Variable type
C3
Address
0018 or 0118
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: None (none)
1: RUN/STOP (stop)
Unit
-
Default
0: None
Note The relationship with the external signal when RUN/STOP has been selected is shown
below.
External signal OFF: STOP (operation stop)
ON: RUN (operation)
• Related Parameter
“Number of Multi-SP uses” (advanced function setting level) (page 154)
See Also
7-6-4
Multi-SP Uses (mspu)
Condition: The “number of multi-SP uses” parameter must be set to 0.
• When set to ON, this parameter enables switching between SP0 and SP1
by using communications command or E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit
key operations.
• Setting changes to this parameter must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Function
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0019 or 0119
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: OFF (off)
1: ON (on)
Unit
-
Default
0: OFF
Note To switch between SPs using event input, set the “number of multi-SP uses” to “1.”
See Also
7-6-5
Function
• Related Parameter
“Number of Multi-SP uses” (advanced function setting level) (page 154)
SP Ramp Set Value (sprt)
• This parameter specifies the rate of change during SP ramp operation.
Set the maximum permissible change width per unit of time (minute) as
the “SP ramp set value.” When the “SP ramp set value” is set to 0, the SP
ramp function is disabled.
• During temperature input, the decimal point position of the SP ramp set
value is dependent on the currently selected sensor, and during analog
input it is dependent on scaling.
• Setting changes to “SP ramp set value” must be enabled by executing a
software reset or by turning ON the power again.
155
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C3
C3
Address
001A
011A
Settings
Setting range
Unit
00000000H to 00000271H (0 to 9999)
0: OFF
0: OFF
• Related Parameters
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
“Scaling upper limit” “Scaling lower limit” “Decimal point” (initial setting
level) (page 144)
See Also
7-6-6
EU/min.
Default
Standby Sequence Reset Method (rest)
Condition: The alarm 1 to 3 type must be set to an alarm with a standby
sequence.
Function
• This parameter sets the conditions for enabling reset after the standby
sequence of the alarm has been canceled.
• Condition A:
Control started (including power ON) or change made in SP, alarm value
(upper/lower limit alarm value), or input shift value (upper/lower limit temperature input shift value).
• Condition B:
Power ON
• The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is
lower limit alarm with standby sequence.
Condition A only
SP change
Alarm point
(after change)
Alarm hysteresis
Condition A only
Alarm point
Standby sequence
canceled point
Standby sequence
reset point
Alarm output:
Condition A
Alarm output:
Condition B
• Setting changes to “standby sequence reset” must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
156
Variable type
C3
Address
001B or 011B
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
Settings
Setting range
Unit
00000000H to 00000001H
0: Condition A (a)
1: Condition B (b)
0: Condition A
• Related Parameters
“Alarm 1to 3 type” (initial setting level) (page 147)
“Alarm 1 to 3 latch” (advanced function setting level) (page 163)
See Also
7-6-7
Default
-
Alarm 1 Open in Alarm (al1n)
Alarm 2 Open in Alarm (al2n)
Alarm 3 Open in Alarm (al3n)
Function
• These parameters set the output states for alarms 1, 2, and 3.
• When the E5ZN is set to “close in alarm,” the alarm output is normally
open. When set to “open in alarm,” the alarm output is normally closed.
The following table shows the relationship between alarm output functions, alarm output, and operation indicator LEDs.
• When alarm 1 is set to “open in alarm,” the heater burnout alarm output
also are also normally closed.
Setting
Alarm Output Function
Alarm Output
Operation
Indicator LEDs
Close in alarm ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Lit
Not lit
Open in alarm ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Lit
Not lit
• Setting changes to “alarm 1 to 3 open in alarm” must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
Setting
Alarm 1 open in alarm
ch
1
Variable type
C3
Address
001C
Alarm 2 open in alarm
2
1
C3
C3
011C
001E
Alarm 3 open in alarm
2
1
C3
C3
011E
0020
2
C3
0120
Settings
Setting
Alarm 1 open in alarm
Alarm 2 open in alarm
Alarm 3 open in alarm
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: Close in alarm (n-o)
1: Open in alarm (n-c)
Unit
-
Default
0: close in
alarm
157
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
• Related Parameters
“Alarm value 1 to 3” (operation level) (page 131)
“Upper limit alarm value 1” “Lower limit alarm value 1” (operation level)
(page 132) “Upper limit alarm value 2” “Lower limit alarm value 2” (operation level) (page 132)
“Alarm 1 to 3 type” (initial setting level) (page 147)
“Control output 1 allocation” “Control output 2 allocation” (initial setting
level) (page 147) “Auxiliary output 1 allocation” “Auxiliary output 2 allocation” (initial setting level) (page 148)
“Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis” (advanced function setting level) (page 158)
“Standby sequence reset method” (advanced function setting level)
(page 156)
“Alarm 1 to 3 latch” (advanced function setting level) (page 163)
See Also
7-6-8
Alarm 1 Hysteresis (alh1)
Alarm 2 Hysteresis (alh2)
Alarm 3 Hysteresis (alh3)
Condition: The alarm type must be set to other than “no alarm.”
Function
• These parameters set the hystereses of alarm outputs 1, 2, and 3.
• Setting changes to “alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis” must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
Setting
Alarm 1 hysteresis
1
ch
Variable type
C3
Address
001D
Alarm 2 hysteresis
2
1
C3
C3
011D
001F
Alarm 3 hysteresis
2
1
C3
C3
011F
0021
2
C3
0121
Settings
Setting
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 hysteresis
Alarm 3 hysteresis
See Also
158
Setting range
00000001H to 00000270H
(0.1 to 999.9)
Unit
Temperature
input: °C/°F
Analog input:
EU
Default
0.2
• Related Parameters
“Alarm value 1 to 2” (operation level) (page 131)
“Upper limit alarm value 1” “Lower limit alarm value 1” (operation level)
(page 132) “Upper limit alarm value 2” “Lower limit alarm value 2” (operation level) (page 133)
“Alarm 1 to 3 type” (initial setting level) (page 147)
“Control output 1 allocation” “Control output 2 allocation” (initial setting
level) (page 147) “Auxiliary output 1 allocation” “Auxiliary output 2 allocation” (initial setting level) (page 148)
“Alarm 1 to 3 open in alarm” (advanced function setting level) (page 157)
“Standby sequence reset method” (advanced function setting level)
(page 156)
“Alarm 1 to 3 latch” (advanced function setting level) (page 163)
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
7-6-9
HBA Used (hbu)
Condition: Pulse output models only
Function
• This parameter sets use of the heater burnout alarm.
• Setting changes to “HBA used” must be enabled by executing a software
reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0022 or 0122
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: Not used (off)
1: Used (on)
Unit
-
Default
1: Used
7-6-10 Heater Burnout Latch (hbl)
Condition: Pulse output models only, and the “HBA used” parameter
must be set to “ON.”
Function
• When this parameter is set to ON, the heater burnout alarm is held until
either of the following conditions is satisfied:
a) Heater burnout detection is set to 0.0 A.
b) The power is turned OFF and then turned ON again (power is reset).
• When switching to setting area 1, the output is turned OFF.
• Setting changes to “heater burnout latch” must be enabled by executing a
software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0023 or 0123
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: Disabled (off)
1: Enabled (on)
See Also
Unit
-
Default
0: Disabled
• Related Parameter
“HBA used” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
7-6-11 Heater Burnout Hysteresis (hbh)
Condition: Pulse output models only, and the “heater burnout latch”
parameter must be set to “OFF.”
Function
• This parameter sets the hysteresis when HBA is detected.
• Setting changes to “heater burnout hysteresis” must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
159
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C3
C3
Address
0024
0124
Settings
Setting range
00000001H to 000001F4H (0.1 to 50.0)
See Also
Unit
A
Default
0.1
• Related Parameter
“HBA used” (advanced function setting level) (page 159)
7-6-12 α (alfa)
Condition: The control must be 2-PID control.
Function
• Normally, use this parameter at its default.
• This parameter sets the 2-PID constant α.
• Setting changes to “α” must be enabled by executing a software reset or
by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0025 or 0125
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000064H (0.00 to 1.00)
See Also
Unit
-
Default
0.65
• Related Parameter
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
7-6-13 MV Upper Limit (ol-h)
MV Lower Limit (ol-l)
Condition: The control must be 2-PID control.
Function
160
• The “MV upper limit” and “MV lower limit” parameters set the upper and
lower limits of the manipulated variable. When the manipulated variable
calculated by the E5ZN exceeds the upper or lower limit, the upper or
lower limit will be used as the output level.
• MV Upper Limit
The setting ranges during standard control and heating and control output
2 control are different.
The manipulated variable at the cooling side during heating and cooling
control is expressed as a negative value.
• MV Lower Limit
The setting ranges during standard control and heating and cooling control are different.
The manipulated variable at the cooling side during heating and cooling
control is expressed as a negative value.
• Setting changes to “MV upper and lower limit” must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
Communications
Setting
ch
Variable type
Address
MV upper limit
1
2
C3
C3
0026
0126
MV lower limit
1
2
C3
C3
0027
0127
Settings
Setting
Setting range
MV upper
limit
MV lower
limit
Unit
Default
For Standard Control:
(MV lower limit + 1)H to 0000041AH
(MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0)
%
105.0
For Heating and Cooling Control:
00000000H to 0000041AH
(0.0 to 105.0)
For Standard Control:
FFFFFFCEH to (MV upper limit − 1)H
(−5.0 to MV upper limit −1)
For Heating and Cooling Control
FFFFFBE6H to 00000000H
(−105.0 to 0.0)
%
105.0
%
-5.0
%
-105.0
• Related Parameter
“PID/OnOff” (initial setting level) (page 145)
See Also
7-6-14 Input Digital Filter (inf)
• Sets the time constant of the input digital filter. The following figure shows
the effect on data after passing through the digital filter:
Function
PV before passing through filter
A
PV after passing through filter
0.63 A
Time constant
Input digital filter
• Setting changes to “input digital filter” must be enabled by executing a
software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
1
2
Variable type
C3
C3
Address
0028
0128
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000270H (0.0 to 999.9)
Unit
Second
Default
0.0
161
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
7-6-15 Additional PV Display (pUad)
Function
• This parameter enables displaying only the PV. It is added to the top of
the operation level of the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit. It is used to
give the option of displaying the PV and SP, or just the PV only.
• Setting changes to “additional PV display” must be enabled by executing
a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0029 or 0129
Settings
Setting range
Unit
00000000H to 00000001H
0: Not added (off)
1: Added (on)
-
Default
0: Not added
7-6-16 Additional Temperature Input Shift Value Display (isdp)
Function
• This parameter conceals the display of the temperature input shift value in
the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit operation level. The input shift function is enabled even when this parameter is set to “no display.”
• Setting changes to “temperature input shift value display/not display”
must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the
power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
002A or 012A
Settings
Setting range
Unit
00000000H to 00000001H
0: No display (off)
1: Display (on)
-
Default
0: No display
7-6-17 Temperature Input Shift Type (istp)
Condition:
Upgraded pulse output models and analog output models only
Function
• This parameter sets whether a one-point shift or a two-point shift is used
as the input shift method.
• This function can be used with upgraded pulse output models and analog
output models only.
Communications
ch
Shared
162
Variable type
C3
Address
003E or 013E
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
Settings
Setting range
Default
00000000H(0): Temperature input one-point shift
00000001H(1): Temperature input two-point shift
See Also
0: Temperature input
one-point shift
Refer to 4-1 Shifting Input Values (page 42).
7-6-18 Alarm 1 Latch (a1lt)
Alarm 2 Latch (a2lt)
Alarm 3 Latch (a3lt)
Condition: The alarm type must be set to other than “no alarm.”
Function
• When these parameters are set to ON, the latch function is added to the
alarm functions. This means that once the alarm function has turned ON,
the alarm output function is held ON until the power is turned OFF. The
latch is canceled if setting area 1 is switched to.
• When alarm output function is set to “open in alarm,” the closed output is
held, and when set to “close in alarm,” the open output is held.
• Setting changes to “alarm 1 to 3 latch” must be enabled by executing a
software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
Setting
ch
Variable type
Address
Alarm 1 latch
1
2
C3
C3
002B
012B
Alarm 2 latch
1
2
C3
C3
002C
012C
Alarm 3 latch
1
2
C3
C3
002D
012D
Settings
Setting
Alarm 1 latch
Alarm 2 latch
Alarm 3 latch
See Also
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: OFF (off)
1: ON (on)
Unit
-
Default
0: OFF
• Related Parameters
“Alarm value 1 to 3” (operation level) (page 131)
“Upper limit alarm value 1” “Lower limit alarm value 1” (operation level)
(page 132) “Upper limit alarm value 2” “Lower limit alarm value 2” (operation level) (page 133)
“Alarm 1 to 3 type” (initial setting level) (page 147)
“Standby sequence reset method” (initial setting level) (page 156)
“Alarm 1 to 3 open in alarm” (advanced function setting level) (page 157)
“Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis” (advanced function setting level) (page 158)
163
Section 7-6
Advanced Function Setting Level
7-6-19 Input Error Output (sero)
Condition: The Alarm 1 must be allocated for control output or auxiliary
output. Analog output models only.
Function
• This parameter sets whether to output only the alarm 1 output or whether
to output an OR of the alarm 1 output and sensor error alarm output when
an alarm 1 output is allocated in control or auxiliary output.
• When the sensor error alarm output is enabled (on), alarm 1 for ch1 will
turn ON when a sensor error occurs in a ch1 input, and alarm 1 for ch2
will turn ON when a sensor error occurs in a ch2 input.
• Set the input alarm output to OFF when moving to the initial setting level,
advanced function setting level, or communications setting level.
• This parameter is supported by analog output models only.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
003D or 013D
Settings
Setting range
Default
00000000H(0): Sensor error alarm output disabled (off)
00000001H(1): Sensor error alarm output enabled (on)
See Also
0: Sensor error alarm
output disabled
• Related Parameters
“Control Output 1 Allocation,” and “Control Output 2 Allocation” (initial setting
level) (page 148)
“Auxiliary Output 3 Allocation,” and “Auxiliary Output 4 Allocation” (initial setting level) (page 149)
7-6-20 Cold Junction Compensation Method (cjc)
Condition: Input type must be thermocouple or infrared temperature
sensor.
Function
• Specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be performed internally by the Controller or to be performed externally when the input type
set value is No. 0 to 15, 17 or 18.
• The cold junction compensation external setting is valid when the temperature difference is measured using two thermocouples or two ES1As.
• Setting changes to “cold junction compensation method” must be enabled
by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
002E or 012E
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000001H
0: External (off)
1: Internal (on)
164
Unit
-
Default
1: Internally
Advanced Function Setting Level
See Also
Section 7-6
• Related Parameter
“Input type” (initial setting level) (page 143)
165
Section 7-7
Communications Setting Level
7-7
Communications Setting Level
7-7-1
Communications Data Length (len)
Setting changes to “communications data length” must be enabled by executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Function
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0013 or 0113
Settings
Setting range
00000007H to 00000008H (7 or 8)
7-7-2
Unit
Bit
Default
7
Communications Stop Bit (sbit)
Setting changes to “communications stop bit” must be enabled by executing a
software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Function
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0014 or 0114
Settings
Setting range
00000001H to 00000002H (1 or 2)
7-7-3
Unit
Bit
Default
2
Communications Parity (prty)
Function
Setting changes to “communications parity” must be enabled by executing a
software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0015 or 0115
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 00000002H
00000000H (0): None (none)
00000001H (1): Even (eUen)
00000002H (2): Odd (odd)
166
Unit
-
Default
1: Even
Section 7-7
Communications Setting Level
7-7-4
Communications Response Wait Time (sdwt)
Function
Setting changes to “communications response wait time” must be enabled by
executing a software reset or by turning ON the power again.
Communications
ch
Shared
Variable type
C3
Address
0016 or 0116
Settings
Setting range
00000000H to 0000270FH (0 to 9999)
Unit
ms
Default
20
167
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting
This section describes the troubleshooting procedure and possible errors and remedies when the E5ZN is not operating
properly. When performing troubleshooting, follow the order in which information is provided in this section.
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Sensing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HB Alarm Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Operations Not Functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8-1 Input Error (s.err) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8-2 Display Range Over (<<<<,>>>>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8-3 Memory Error (e111) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8-4 Current Value Exceeded (ffff) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8-5 Disabled Status (----) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
171
172
174
176
177
178
179
179
179
179
180
180
169
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting Procedure
8-1
Troubleshooting Procedure
If the E5ZN has an error, refer to the following items to find the possible cause
of the error and take corrective measures.
1,2,3...
170
1. Indicators
Check the operating status of the E5ZN using the indicators.
If the ERROR indicator is lit, turn the E5ZZ OFF and ON. If the ERROR
indicator is not lit after the E5ZN is turned ON, it may mean that the E5ZN
is being influenced by noise. Find the source of the noise and provide adequate protection against it.
2. Switch, Selectors, and Wiring
Check if the switch and selector settings of the E5ZN, the wiring of the
E5ZN and devices connected to the E5ZN are correct.
a) Power Supply
• Check that the power supply connected to the E5ZN is turned ON.
• Check whether the supply voltage at the power supply terminals is
within the allowable voltage range of the E5ZN.
b) Switch and Selectors
Check that the switch and selectors of the E5ZN are correctly set according to the system.
c) Wiring
• Check that the terminal block wiring is correct.
• Check that the polarity of each wire connected to the E5ZN is correct.
• Check if any wire is disconnected.
• Check if a wire or cable is cut or short-circuited.
d) Communications Conditions
Check that the communications conditions of the E5ZN are compatible
with the host connected to the E5ZN.
Check the above items and remedy any problems listed above. If the error
persists after error processing, perform further checks through communications.
3. Checking through Communications
• Check the end code and error code with the response returned from
the E5ZN.
• Check the status of the E5ZN with the Status Read Command.
• Check if the functions used with the E5ZN have any operating restrictions.
• Check if the set data items of the communication commands used for
the E5ZN are correct.
Troubleshoot problems on the basis of the data read with the E5ZE.
4. Troubleshooting Based on Error Symptoms
If the cause of the error is still unknown after checking all the previously
mentioned items, find the cause by isolating the symptoms of the error
while referring to the tables in 8-2 Communications Errors, and correct the
problem accordingly.
Section 8-2
Communications Errors
8-2
Communications Errors
Communications Not Possible or No Response
Communications
conditions
Connections
Probable cause
Remedy
Baud rate of the E5ZN is different from that of the Set the same rate.
host.
Communications method of the E5ZN is different
from that of the host.
Match the communications method of the E5ZN
to the host's communications conditions.
Excessive number of E5ZN Units are connected
in parallel.
Do not connect an excessive number of E5ZN
Units.
• The number of E5ZN Units that can be connected to the host for RS-485 communications
is 16 max.
Transmission path is too long.
The transmission path must be within the permissible range.
• The maximum RS-485 transmission path is
500 m in total.
Make sure that different numbers are assigned to
all the E5ZNUnits that communicate with the host.
Same unit number has been allocated more than
once on the same transmission path.
Communications data error due to ambient noise. • Move the communications cable away from the
source of noise.
• Use shielded communication cables.
• Use an Optical Interface.
• Write a program that makes it possible for the
host to detect a response error for any command that the host transmits and to re-transmit
it again.
Program
Settings
Mistake in the use of the Optical Interface and
RS-232C/RS-485 Converter Units.
Refer to the datasheets of the Optical Interface
and RS-232C/RS-485 Converter Units used.
Terminators incorrectly attached to RS-485.
Attach terminators only to the devices at each end
of the communications path.
System begins communications without any inter- Write a program so that the system starts commuval after the E5ZN Units are turned ON.
nications with an interval of 4 s min. after the
E5ZN Units are turned ON.
Unstable signal of the E5ZN, which is generated
when the E5ZN is turned ON or OFF, is read as
data by the host.
Initialize the reception buffer of the host at the following stages.
• Before the host transmits the first command.
• After the E5ZN is turned OFF.
Host sends commands to the E5ZN before
receiving any response from the E5ZN.
Interval between the time the host receives a
response and sends a command is too short.
Write a program enabling the host to read the
response after the host sends any command.
The interval between the time the host receives a
response and sends a command must be 5 minutes minimum.
Program of the host is incorrect.
• Correct the program.
• Check the command with the line monitoring
function.
• Run a sample program with the host.
Unit numbers set with the selectors are different
from those set using the commands of the host.
The unit numbers must coincide.
171
Section 8-3
Temperature Sensing Errors
8-3
Temperature Sensing Errors
Temperature Sensing Not Possible or Abnormal
Connections
Probable cause
Remedy
Polarity or wiring of a temperature sensor is incor- Correct the wiring of the temperature sensor.
rect.
Temperature sensor is not an applicable one.
Replace the temperature sensor with an applicable one.
Leads of a temperature sensor are disconnected, Replace the temperature sensor.
short-circuited, or deteriorated.
Temperature sensors are not used.
Thermocouple does not use applicable compensating conductors.
Use temperature sensors.
• Replace the thermocouple with another thermocouple with long leads.
• Connect applicable compensating conductors
for the thermocouple.
Thermocouple is connected to the E5ZN with a
Connect a thermocouple-dedicated device
device using a metal that is different in type from between the thermocouple and the E5ZN.
the metal of the thermocouple or that of the compensating conductors.
A screw of the terminal block of the E5ZN is loos- Tighten the screw.
ened and improper contact is resulting.
Leads or compensating conductors of a thermo- • Use sufficiently thick compensating conduccouple are too long and leads or compensating
tors.
conductors have resistance.
• Change the location of the thermocouple so
that the length of the leads or compensating
conductors can be shortened.
The resistance of the conductors for the 3 termi- Use conductors that are the same in resistance
nals is different from the resistance of the temper- for the two B terminals and the A terminal.
ature sensor connected to the E5ZN.
Installation
Noise is affecting the E5ZN.
• Separate the E5ZN from the source of the
noise.
• Connect a surge absorber or noise filter to the
device generating the noise.
Inductive noise generated from power lines is
affecting the leads of a temperature sensor.
•
•
•
•
•
Thermal response of a temperature sensor connected to the E5ZN is slow because the temperature sensor is located far from the temperature
controlling position of the E5ZN.
Ambient operating temperature of the E5ZN is not
within the allowable ambient operating temperature range of the E5ZN.
Ambient operating temperature of the E5ZN is not
within the allowable ambient operating temperature range of the E5ZN.
Locate the tip of the protective tubing of the temperature sensor at the temperature controlling
position.
Separate the leads from the power lines.
Wire the leads in a separate conduit or duct.
Do not wire the leads alongside power lines.
Shorten the leads.
Shield the leads.
The ambient operating temperature range of the
E5ZN must be between -10 and 55°C.
Shield the E5ZN.
E5ZN is affected by heat radiation from Peripheral Install the E5ZN in a location where it will not be
Devices and the temperature of the terminal block affected by heat radiation.
of the E5ZN is not even.
Terminal block of the E5ZN is affected by wind.
172
Protect the terminal block of the E5ZN against
wind.
Section 8-3
Temperature Sensing Errors
Settings
Operation
Probable cause
Remedy
Selector settings for the input type of temperature Correct the input type setting.
sensor are incorrect.
Celsius-Fahrenheit designation of the E5ZN is
incorrect.
Correct the °C/°F selection switch setting.
The PV appears to be incorrect due to the input
shift setting.
Set the input shift to 0.0.
Data setting unit is incorrect.
Program of the host is incorrect.
Change the program of the host.
Temperature sensor input terminals of the E5ZN
thermocouple input model have been short-circuited.
Connect a thermocouple to the temperature sensor input terminals.
Temperature sensor connected to the E5ZN has Turn OFF the power to the E5ZN, and then turn
been replaced or the switch or selector settings of ON again.
the E5ZN have been changed while the power is
ON.
Simple Method for Checking Temperature Sensors
Platinum Resistance Thermometer
1,2,3...
1. Connect a 100-Ω resistor between the A and B temperature sensor input
terminals and short-circuit the B terminals.
2. If the temperature sensed by the E5ZN is 0.0°C or 32.0°F, the E5ZN is operating normally.
1,2,3...
1. Short-circuit the temperature sensor input terminals of the E5ZN.
2. If the E5ZN senses the temperature of the terminal block of the E5ZN, the
E5ZN is operating normally.
Thermocouple
173
Section 8-4
Temperature Control Errors
8-4
Temperature Control Errors
Temperature Does Not Rise
Connections
Probable cause
PV of the E5ZN is abnormal.
Remedy
Refer to 8-3 Temperature Sensing Errors for
appropriate troubleshooting.
Load is not connected to the control output termi- Connect a load.
nal of the E5ZN.
Polarity or wiring of a load is incorrect.
Correct the wiring of the load.
A screw of the terminal block of the E5ZN is loos- Tighten the screw.
ened and improper contact is resulting.
Power is not supplied to heaters.
Supply power to the heaters.
Settings
Heaters are burnt out or have deteriorated.
Heat capacity of the heater is too small.
Replace the heaters.
• Replace the heater with one having a larger
heat capacity.
• If more than one heater is used and some are
burnt out, replace the heaters.
Overheating prevention device for the E5ZN is
operating.
The set value of the overheating prevention
device must be larger than the set value of the
E5ZN.
Correct the operation mode setting.
E5ZN is in reverse operation mode, instead of
direct operation mode, or vice versa.
PID constants of the E5ZN are incorrect.
• Execute autotuning.
• Set the PID constants of the E5ZN to appropriate values.
E5ZN has not started temperature control.
Operation after power ON (initial setting level) is
set to STOP.
Start the temperature control.
Set the RUN/STOP parameter (operation level) to
RUN.
The initial setting level, communications setting
level, or advanced function setting level is
selected.
Control output value of the E5ZN does not
increase because of the restrictions of the MV
limit.
Cooling fan is operating.
Move to the operation level, and set the RUN/
STOP parameter to RUN.
Set the MV limit of the E5ZN to an appropriate
value.
Turn OFF the cooling fan.
PV Exceeds SP
Probable cause
Connections
PV of the E5ZN is abnormal.
Remedy
Refer to 8-3 Temperature Sensing Errors for
appropriate troubleshooting.
Load is connected to the incorrect control point of Correct the wiring of the load.
the E5ZN and is controlling the heaters with the
control output of the incorrect control point.
Settings
Relay driven by control output has contact weld.
SSR is short-circuited.
Replace the relay.
Replace the SSR.
SSR leakage current is flowing into the heaters.
Connect a bleeder resistance to the SSR to prevent operation with the SSR leakage current.
E5ZN is in reverse operation mode, instead of
direct operation mode, or vice versa.
Correct the operation mode setting.
• Execute autotuning.
• Set the PID constants of the E5ZN to the values suitable to the system.
Control output value of the E5ZN does not
Set the MV limit of the E5ZN to an appropriate
increase because of the restrictions of the set MV value.
limit.
E5ZN is outputting in manual mode.
Interrupt the manual mode of the E5ZN.
PID constants of the E5ZN are incorrect.
174
Section 8-4
Temperature Control Errors
Operation
Probable cause
Controlled object is radiating heat.
Remedy
Execute heating and cooling control.
Controlled object is influenced by large overshooting.
Refer to the following table regarding overshooting and undershooting for appropriate troubleshooting.
Overshooting or Undershooting
Probable cause
Connections
PV of the E5ZN is abnormal.
General-purpose temperature sensor with slow
thermal response characteristics is being used to
sense a controlled object with quick thermal
response characteristics.
Settings
Remedy
Refer to 8-3 Temperature Sensing Errors for
appropriate troubleshooting.
Change to a sheath-type temperature sensor.
E5ZN has a narrow proportional band and small P • Increase the P constant keeping within the
constant.
range where the response delay caused by the
P constant can be allowed.
• Execute autotuning.
E5ZN has a short integral time or small I constant. • Increase the I constant keeping within the
range where the response delay caused by the
I constant can be allowed.
• Execute autotuning.
E5ZN has a short derivative time or small D constant.
E5ZN is executing ON and OFF control.
• Increase the D constant keeping within the
range where the D constant will not have an
undesirable influence on temperature stability.
• Execute autotuning.
Execute P or PID control.
Control period is too long when the E5ZN controls Shorten the control period.
the temperature of an object with quick thermal
response characteristics.
Dead band instead of an overlap band is set with Set the overlap band of the E5ZN.
the E5ZN in heating and cooling control operation.
Hunting
For troubleshooting problems with connections and settings, refer to the same
probable causes and remedies as provided for overshooting and undershooting.
Probable cause
Operation
Heat capacity of a heater controlling the temperature of an object is too large for the object.
Heat capacity of a controlled object changes due
to periodical external disturbances.
E5ZN is executing autotuning.
Remedy
Use a heater with a heat capacity suited to the
object.
Take appropriate measures to prevent the periodical external disturbances.
Hunting will not occur if autotuning is completed.
175
Section 8-5
Output Errors
8-5
Output Errors
Control Output or Alarm Output Does Not Turn ON
Connections
Probable cause
PV of the E5ZN is abnormal.
Remedy
Refer to 8-3 Temperature Sensing Errors for
appropriate troubleshooting.
Polarity of the load or connected terminals are
wired incorrectly.
Correct the wiring.
Load exceeding the output ratings of the E5ZN is • Connect a load that does not exceed the outconnected.
put ratings to the E5ZN.
• Request repair of the E5ZN if it is malfunctioning.
Settings
Load power supply is not connected to transistor
output.
Polarity of the load power supply for transistor
output is incorrect.
Operation after power ON has been stopped.
Provide a power supply satisfying the output ratings of the E5ZN and suitable for the load.
Correct the wiring.
E5ZN has not started control operation.
Sent a Control Operation RUN command from the
host.
Control point designation is incorrect.
SP of the E5ZN is set incorrectly.
Set the correct control point numbers.
Correct the SP settings.
The output allocation is incorrect.
Incorrect multi-SP is designated.
Set the correct output allocation.
Set the correct multi-SP.
The same multi-SP is selected for all channels
because event input is designated for multi-SP.
Specify a setting other than “event input” for multiSP so that different multi-SP can be designated
for each channel.
• Send A Control Operation run command from
the host after turning the E5ZN ON.
• Set operation after power ON to “continue.”
When designating multi-SP with event input, the Set the E5ZN so that the ON or OFF status of the
ON or OFF status of the input is not kept on hold. input is kept on hold while designating the multiSP with the event input.
E5ZN attempts multi-SP designation with commu- Correct the multi-SP designation method setting.
nications when multi-SP event input designation
is selected.
Alarm mode of the E5ZN is set to 0 (no alarm
Set the correct alarm mode.
function).
Use alarms without a standby sequence.
Alarm mode of the E5ZN is set to alarm with
standby sequence.
Deviation value and absolute value are incorrect
for the alarm mode set.
176
Set the correct alarm mode.
Section 8-6
HB Alarm Errors
8-6
HB Alarm Errors
HB Alarm Errors: Heater Burnout Detection Function Not Possible
Connections
Probable cause
Current Transformer is not connected.
Remedy
Connect a Current Transformer to the E5ZN.
Settings
Current Transformer is wired to an incorrect channel of the E5ZN.
Heaters are controlled directly with an alarm output.
E5ZN has not started control operation.
Wire the Current Transformer to the correct channel.
Change the wiring so that the CT input is connected to the correct control output.
Start the control operation.
Control output is ON for less than 190 ms.
The HB alarm will operate if the control output is
turned ON for 190 ms or more.
HB alarm is not set in output allocations.
Set “Alarm 1 and HAB OR output” in output
assignments.
Heaters are turned ON after the E5ZN starts con- Turn ON the heaters before starting the E5ZN
trol operation.
control operation.
Heater burnout detection current value of the
Set the heater burnout detection current value to
E5ZN is set to 0.0 or 50.0 A.
an appropriate value between 0.1 and 49.9 A.
Heater burnout detection current value of the
Determine the heater burnout detection current
E5ZN is set to the rated current.
value from the actual current consumption of the
heaters.
Heater burnout detection current value obtained Reset the heater burnout detection current value
from the actual current consumption of the heat- by considering the voltage range of the power
ers is incorrect.
supply for the heaters and any error in measurement of the current.
Operation
Total current consumption of the heaters connected to the E5ZN exceeds 50.0 A.
Set the heater current to 50.0 A maximum.
Heaters connected are supplied with DC.
Pure metal heaters are being used.
The HB alarm do not operate under this condition.
Determine the heater burnout detection current
value from the actual current consumption of the
heaters.
177
Section 8-7
Key Operations Not Functioning
8-7
Key Operations Not Functioning
The Setting Display Unit Key Operations Are Not Functioning
Probable cause
Setting
Setting change protection
(protect level) is set to ON.
Remedy
Set the setting change protection (protect level) to OFF.
Cannot Move to Another Level from the Setting Display Device
Setting
Probable cause
Initial setting/communications
protection (protect level) is set
to disable movement to
another level.
Remedy
Change the setting/communications protection (protect
level) setting, and set to
enable movement to the initial
setting level, communications
setting level, or advanced
function setting level as
required.
The SP Cannot Be Changed from the Setting Display Device
Probable cause
Setting
178
Remedy
The operation/adjustment pro- Set the operation/adjustment
tection (protect level) is set to protection (protect level) setthe set value 3.
ting to 0, 1, or 2, as required.
Section 8-8
Error Displays
8-8
Error Displays
When an error has occurred, the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit indicates the
error code. This section describes how to check error codes on the display,
and the actions you must take to remedy the problem.
8-8-1
Input Error (s.err)
Meaning
The input value has exceeded the control range.
Control Range
Platinum resistance thermometer, thermocouple input:
Temperature setting lower limit −20°C to temperature setting upper limit 20°C
(temperature setting lower limit −40°F to temperature setting upper limit 40°F)
ES1A input:
Same as input indication range
Analog input:
−5% to 105% of scaling range
Action
Check the wiring of inputs for mistakes in wiring, disconnections, short-circuits, and the input type.
If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type, turn the power OFF
then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the E5ZN must be
repaired. If the display is restored, then a probable cause can be electrical
noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise.
Operation at Error
After the error occurs, the error is displayed, and control output functions turn
OFF.
Alarm outputs function as if the upper limit has been exceeded.
An error message is displayed when “PV” or “PV/SP” is displayed.
8-8-2
Display Range Over (<<<<,>>>>)
Meaning
Although this is not an error, this is displayed when the PV exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range (−1999
(−199.9) to 9999 (999.9)).
• When less than “−1999” (−199.9)<<<<
• When larger than “9999” (999.9) >>>>
Action
Control continues, allowing normal operation. An error message is displayed
when “PV” or “PV/SP” is displayed.
8-8-3
Memory Error (e111)
Meaning
Internal memory operation for the E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit is in error.
Action
First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the
same, the E5ZN must be replaced. If the display is restored, then a probable
cause can be electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical
noise.
Operation at Error
Key operations are not possible.
179
Section 8-8
Error Displays
8-8-4
Current Value Exceeded (ffff)
Meaning
This error is displayed when the heater current value exceeds 55.0A.
Action
Control continues, allowing normal operation. An error message is displayed
when the heater current value monitor is displayed.
8-8-5
Disabled Status (----)
Meaning
This error is displayed when one of the following errors has occurred in the
connection with the E5ZN.
• The connecting cable is disconnected.
• The power supply to the E5ZN-SDL has been turned OFF while in copy
mode.
• A memory error has occurred in the E5ZN. The control output and alarm
outputs will be OFF for the E5ZN generating the error.
Action
Units that do not show this disabled status will continue control and will operate normally. The selected Unit and the channel status will be displayed.
180
Appendix A
Specifications
Ratings
Supply voltage
Operating voltage
range
Power consumption
24 VDC
85% to 110% of rated supply voltage
Sensor input
Thermocouple:
K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor:
K10 to 70°C, K60 to 120°C, K115 to 165°C, K160 to 260°C
Voltage input:
0 to 50 mV
Pulse voltage
12 VDC ± 15%, max. load current 21 mA
output (PNP)
Short-circuit proof
Control output
Approx. 3 W
Transistor output
Max. operational voltage 30 VDC, max. load current 100 mA
Max. residual voltage 1.5 V, max. leakage current 0.4 mA
Linear current
output
Current output range: 4 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA DC (resolution: 3,000)
Allowable load impedance: 350 kΩ max. (See note.)
Sink type
Source type
Max. operational voltage 30 VDC, max. load current 50 mA
Max. residual voltage 1.5 V, max. leakage current 0.4 mA
Linear voltage
output
Voltage output range: 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 5 VDC (resolution: 3,000)
Allowable load impedance: 10 kΩ min.
Event input
Contact
Non-contact
ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
ON: Max. residual voltage 1.5 V, OFF: Max. leakage current 0.1 mA
No. of input/control
points
Setting method
2 input points, 2 control points
Control method
Other functions
2-PID or ON/OFF control
Heater burnout alarm function, multi-SP with event input or RUN/STOP selection
Ambient temperature
−10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Auxiliary output
Communications or E5ZN-SDL Setting Display Unit
Ambient humidity
25% to 85%
Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude
Inrush current
2,000 m or less
13 A max.
Recommended fuse T4A, 125 V, time lag, low shut-off capacity
Installation environ- Installation Category II, Pollution Class 2 (UL3121-1, CSA C22-2 No. 1010-1 compliant)
ment
Note The G32A-EA Cycle Control Unit (manufactured by OMRON, allowable load impedance: 352 Ω) can be used.
HBA
Max. heater current
Single-phase AC 50 A
Input current readout accuracy
Heater burnout alarm setting range
±5%FS±1 digit max.
0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units)
0.0 A: Heater burnout alarm output turns OFF.
50.0 A: Heater burnout alarm output turns ON.
Min. detection ON time (See note.)
190 ms
Note When the control output ON time is less than 190 ms, heater burnout detection and heater current measurement are
not performed.
181
Appendix A
Specifications
Characteristics
Indication accuracy
Temperature
variation influence
(See note 2.)
Voltage variation
influence
(See note 2.)
Thermocouple:
(±0.5% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. (See note 1.)
Platinum resistance thermometer:
(±0.5% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±0.5% FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±0.5% FS ±1 digit max.
Thermocouple (R, S, B):
(±1% of PV or ±10°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Other thermocouples:
(±1% of PV or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
*K thermocouple at −100°C max: ±10°C max.
Platinum resistance thermometer:
(±1% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1% FS ±1 digit max.
Transfer output
Accuracy: ±0.5% FS (See note 3.)
Hysteresis
Proportional band
(P)
0.1 to 999.9 EU (in units of 0.1 EU)
0.1 to 999.9 EU (in units of 0.1 EU)
Integral time (I)
Derivative time (D)
0 to 3,999 s (in units of 1 second)
0 to 3,999 s (in units of 1 second)
Control period
Manual reset value
1 to 99 s (in units of 1 second)
0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range
Sampling period
−1999 to 9999 (decimal point position dependent on input type)
500 ms
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength
600 VAC 50 or 60 Hz 1min
Vibration resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 10 m/s2 for 2 hrs. each in X, Y and Z directions
Shock resistance
150 m/s2 max. 3 times each in 3 axes, 6 directions
Protective structure
Temperature Controller Module
Terminal Unit
Memory protection
Weight
EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000)
Temperature Controller Module
Approx. 90 g
Note 1.
2.
3.
IP00
IP00
Basic Terminal Unit
Approx. 100 g
Expansion Terminal Unit
Approx. 80 g
The indication of K thermocouples in the −200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of
−100°C or less, and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is ±2°C ±1 digit maximum. The indication of B
thermocouples at a temperature of 400°C or less is unrestricted.
The indication of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C or less is ±3°C ±1 digit maximum.
Ambient temperature: −10°C to 23°C to 55°C
Voltage range: −15 to +10% of rated voltage
When 0 to 20 mA DC is selected, the accuracy for 0 to 4 mA is ±0.5% FS + 0.7 mA.
When 0 to 5 VDC is selected, the accuracy for 0 to 1 V is ±0.5% FS + 0.175 V.
Ratings/Specifications for Setting Display Unit (Sold Separately)
Supply voltage
Operating voltage range
24 VDC
85% to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption
Indication method
Approx. 1 W
7-segment digital display and single-light indicator
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
−10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
25% to 85%
Storage temperature
−25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
182
Appendix A
Specifications
Altitude
Recommended fuse
2,000 m or less
T4A, 125 V, time lag, low shut-off capacity
Communications method
Communications format
RS-485 (half duplex)
Fixed
Insulation resistance
Dielectric strength
20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
1500 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz 1min
Vibration resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs. each in X, Y and Z directions
Shock resistance
300 m/s2 max. 3 times each in 3 axes, 6 directions
Protective structure
Memory protection
Front panel: IP50, Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00
EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000)
Weight
Approx. 100 g, Adapter: approx. 10g
Current Transformer (CT)
Specifications
Item
Specifications
E54-CT3
Model
E54-CT1
Max. continuous current
Dielectric strength
50 A
1000 VAC (for 1 minute)
Vibration resistance
Weight
50 Hz 98m/s2 {10G}
Approx. 11.5 g
Accessory
None
120 A (See note.)
Approx. 50 g
Armature (2)
Plug (2)
Note The maximum continuous current of the E5ZN is 50 A.
External Dimensions (Unit: mm)
E54-CT1
21
15
2.8
7.5
8
5.
a.
di
25
10.5
3
40
o,
Tw
5
3.
a.
di
10
30
183
Appendix A
Specifications
E54-CT3
2.36 dia.
30
9
a.
di
40 × 40
12
M
o,
Tw
3
de
15
30
184
h
pt
4
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
Sensor
Platinum
resistance
thermometer
input
type
Thermocouple
input
type
Input
type
Set
value
Input temperature setting range
Control range
PlatiPt100
num
resistance
therJPt100
mometer
0
1
−200 to 850°C or −300 to 1,500°F
−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to 900.0°F
−220 to 870°C or −340 to 1,540°F
−219.9 to 520.0°C or −239.9 to 940.0°F
2
3
0.0 to 100.0°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F
−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to 900.0°F
−20.0 to 120.0°C or −40.0 to 250.0°F
−219.9 to 520.0°C or −239.9 to 940.0°F
4
0.0 to 100.0°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F
−20.0 to 120.0°C or −40.0 to 250.0°F
Thermo- K
couple
0
−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F
−220 to 1,320°C or −340 to 2,340°F
J
1
2
−20.0 to 500.0°C or 0.0 to 900.0°F
−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F
−40.0 to 520.0°C or −40.0 to 940.0°F
−120 to 870°C or −140 to 1540°F
T
3
4
−20.0 to 400.0°C or 0.0 to 750.0°F
−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F
−40.0 to 420.0°C or −40.0 to 790.0°F
−220 to 420°C or −340 to 740°F
E
17
5
−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to 700.0°F
0 to 600°C or 0 to 1,100°F
−219.9 to 420.0°C or −239.9 to 740.0°F
−20 to 620°C or −40 to 1,140°F
L
U
6
7
−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F
−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F
−120 to 870°C or −140 to 1,540°F
−220 to 420°C or −340 to 740°F
N
18
8
−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to 700.0°F
−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F
−219.9 to 420.0°C or −239.9 to 740.0°F
−220 to 1,320°C or −340 to 2,340°F
R
S
9
10
0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F
0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F
−20 to 1,720°C or −40 to 3,040°F
−20 to 1,720°C or −40 to 3,040°F
B
K10 to
70°C
K60 to
120°C
K115 to
165°C
11
12
100 to 1,800°C or 300 to 3,200°F
0 to 90°C or 0 to 190°F
0 to 1,820°C or 0 to 3,240°F
−20 to 130°C or −40 to 270°F
13
0 to 120°C or 0 to 240°F
−20 to 160°C or −40 to 320°F
14
0 to 165°C or 0 to 320°F
−20 to 205°C or −40 to 400°F
K160 to
260°C
15
0 to 260°C or 0 to 500°F
−20 to 300°C or −40 to 580°F
0 to
50 mA
16
One of the following ranges depending
on the results of scaling:
−1,999 to 9,999 or −199.9 to 999.9
−5% to 105% of setting range
ES1A
Infrared
Temperature
Sensor
Analog
input
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Name
Default is 0.
The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B:
JIS C1602-1995, IEC 584-1
L:
Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985
U:
Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985
JPt100:
JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
Pt100:
JIS C 1604-1997 IEC 751
185
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
List of E5ZN-SDL Settings
Operation Level
Parameter
No. 1 display:
Characters
No. 2 display:
Default
PV
---
PV/SP
0
Setting (monitor) value
Multi-SP
n-sp
0
Displayed when a screen for PV display only
has been added in additional PV display
(advanced function setting level).
Temperature: Range specified for sensor input
Analog: Scaling lower limit −5% FS to scaling
upper limit +5% FS
0: SP0, 1: SP1
Ramp SP value monitor
Heater current value monitor
sp-n
ct
0
0.0
SP lower limit to SP upper limit
0.0 to 55.0 (pulse output models only)
RUN/STOP
Alarm value 1
r-s
al-1
stop
0
run: Start operation, stop: Stop operation
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
Alarm upper limit value 1
al-1h
0
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
Alarm lower limit value 1
Alarm value 2
al-1l
al-2
0
0
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
Alarm upper limit value 2
Alarm lower limit value 2
al-2h
al-2l
0
0
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
Alarm value 3
MV monitor for heating
al-3
o
0
0.0
−1999 to 1999/−199.9 to 999.9
Standard control: −5.0 to 105.0
Heating and cooling control: 0.0 to 105.0
MV monitor for cooling
c-o
0.0
Heating and cooling control: 0.0 to 105.0
Adjustment Level
Parameter
No. 2 display:
Default
No. 1 display:
Characters
Setting (monitor) value
AT execute/cancel
Communications writing
at
cmwt
off
on
on: AT execute, off: AT cancel
on: Enabled, off: Disabled
Heater current value monitor
Heater burnout detection
ct
hb
0.0
0.0
0.0 to 55.0 (pulse output models only)
0.0 to 55.0 (pulse output models only)
SP 0
SP 1
sp-0
sp-1
0
0
SP lower limit to SP upper limit
SP lower limit to SP upper limit
Temperature input shift
ins
Upper limit temperature input insh
shift value
0.0
0.0
−199.9 to 999.9
−199.9 to 999.9
Lower limit temperature input insl
shift value
0.0
−199.9 to 999.9
Proportional band
Integral time
p
i
8.0
233
0.1 to 999.9
0 to 3999
Derivative time
Cooling coefficient
d
c-sc
40
1.00
0 to 3999
0.01 to 99.99
Dead band
Manual reset value
c-db
of-r
0.0
50.0
−199.9 to 999.9
1.1 to 100.0
Heating hysteresis
Cooling hysteresis
hys
chys
1.0
1.0
0.1 to 999.9
0.1 to 999.9
186
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
Initial Setting Level
Parameter
Input type
No. 1 display:
Characters
in-t
No. 2 display:
Default
Setting (monitor) value
0
Platinum-resistance thermometer input:
0: Pt (−200 to 850°C or −300 to 1,500°F)
1: Pt (−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to
900.0°F)
2: Pt (0.0 to 100°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F)
3: JPt (−199.9 to 500.0°C or −199.9 to
900.0°F)
4: JPt (0.0 to 100.0°C or 0.0 to 210.0°F)
0
Thermocouple input:
0: K (−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F)
1: K (−20.0 to 500.0°C or 0.0 to 900.0°F)
2: J (−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F)
3: J (−20.0 to 400.0°C or 0.0 to 750.0°F)
4: T (−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F)
5: E (0 to 600°C or 0 to 1,100°F)
6: L (−100 to 850°C or −100 to 1,500°F)
7: U (−200 to 400°C or −300 to 700°F)
8: N (−200 to 1,300°C or −300 to 2,300°F)
9: R (0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F)
10: S (0 to 1,700°C or 0 to 3,000°F)
11: B (100 to 1,800°C or 300 to 3,200°F)
12: Infrared temperature sensor
(K10 to 70°C)
13: Infrared temperature sensor
(K60 to 120°C)
14: Infrared temperature sensor
(K115 to 165°C)
15: Infrared temperature sensor
(K160 to 260°C)
16: 0 to 50 mV
17: T (−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to
700.0°F)
18: U (−199.9 to 400.0°C or −199.9 to
700.0°F)
Scaling upper limit
Scaling lower limit
in-h
in-l
100
0
Scaling lower limit + 1 to 9999
−1999 to scaling upper limit −1
Decimal point
°C/°F selection
dp
d-u
0
c
0: 0000 1: 000.0
c: °C, f: °F
SP upper limit
sl-h
850 (Pt)/ 1300 (TC)
SP lower limit
sl-l
-200
Temperature: SP lower limit +1 to input range
upper limit
Analog: SP lower limit +1 to scaling upper
limit
Temperature: Input range lower limit to SP
upper limit −1
Analog: SP lower limit +1 to scaling upper
limit
PID/OnOff
Heating control period
cntl
cp
pid
2
onof: ON/OFF control, pid: 2-PID control
1 to 99
Cooling control period
Direct/reverse operation
c-cp
oreU
2
or-r
1 to 99
or-r: Reverse operation or-d: Direct operation
187
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
Parameter
Alarm 1 type
No. 1 display:
Characters
alt1
2
0: No alarm function
1: Upper and lower limit alarm
2: Upper limit alarm
3: Lower limit alarm
4: Upper and lower limit range alarm
5: Upper and lower limit alarm with standby
sequence
6: Upper limit alarm with standby sequence
7: Lower limit alarm with standby sequence
8: Absolute value upper limit alarm
9: Absolute value lower limit alarm
10: Absolute value upper limit alarm with
standby sequence
11: Absolute value lower limit alarm with
standby sequence
Alarm 2 type
Alarm 3 type
alt2
alt3
2
2
Same as for alarm 1 type.
Same as for alarm 1 type.
Control output 1 allocation
out1
0
0: Heating control output for ch1
1: Cooling control output for ch1
2: Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch1
(pulse output models only)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output
for ch1 (analog output models only)
3: Alarm 2 output for ch1
4: Alarm 3 output for ch1
5: Heating control output for ch2
6: Cooling control output for ch2
7:Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2
(pulse output models only)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output
for ch2 (analog output models only)
8: Alarm 2 output for ch2
9: Alarm 3 output for ch2
Control output 2 allocation
188
out2
No. 2 display:
Default
5
Setting (monitor) value
10: SP transfer output for ch1 (analog output
models only)
11: Ramp SP transfer output for ch1 (analog
output models only)
12: PV transfer output for ch1 (analog output
models only)
13: Heating MV transfer output for ch1(analog
output models only)
14: Cooling MV transfer output for ch1 (analog output models only)
15: SP transfer output for ch2 (analog output
models only)
16: Ramp SP transfer output for ch2 (analog
output models only)
17: PV transfer output for ch2 (analog output
models only)
18: Heating MV transfer output for ch2 (analog output models only)
19: Cooling MV transfer output for ch2 (analog output models only)
Same as for control output 1 allocation.
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
Parameter
Auxiliary output 1 allocation
No. 1 display:
Characters
sub1
No. 2 display:
Default
Setting (monitor) value
2
0: Heating control output for ch1
1: Cooling control output for ch1
2: Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch1
(pulse output models only)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output
for ch1 (analog output models only)
3: Alarm 2 output for ch1
4: Alarm 3 output for ch1
5: Heating control output for ch2
6: Cooling control output for ch2
7: Alarm 1 and HB alarm OR output for ch2
(pulse output models only)
Alarm 1 and sensor error alarm OR output
for ch2 (analog output models only)
8: Alarm 2 output for ch2
9: Alarm 3 output for ch2
Auxiliary output 2 allocation
Auxiliary output 3 allocation
sub2
sub3
7
12
Auxiliary output 4 allocation
sub4
17
Operation after power ON
cont
no
OUT1 transfer output upper
limit
OUT1 transfer output lower
limit
OUT2 transfer output upper
limit
tr1h
850 (Pt)/ 1300 (TC)
tr1l
-200
tr2h
850 (Pt)/ 1300 (TC)
Same as auxiliary output 1 allocation.
Same as control output 1
Analog output
allocation.
models only
Same as control output 1
allocation.
no: Stop, yes: Continue (Continues the operation status from before the power supply was
stopped.)
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
Analog output
999.9
models only
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
OUT2 transfer output lower
limit
tr2l
-200
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
SUB3 transfer output upper
limit
tr3h
850 (Pt)/ 1300 (TC)
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
SUB3 transfer output lower
limit
SUB4 transfer output upper
limit
SUB4 transfer output lower
limit
Current output type
tr3l
-200
tr4h
850 (Pt)/ 1300 (TC)
tr4l
-200
ot-1
0
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
−1999 to 9999 or −199.9 to
999.9
0: 4 to 20 mA DC,
1: 0 to 20 mA DC
Voltage output type
Sensor error indicator used
ot-2
sedu
0
3
Move to advanced function
setting level
amoU
0
0: 1 to 5 VDC, 1: 0 to 5 VDC
0: Indicators always not lit
(both ch1 and ch2)
1: Sensor error indicator lit
(ch1 only)
2: Sensor error indicator lit
(ch2 only)
3: Sensor error indicators lit
(both ch1 and ch2)
−1999 to 9999
Analog output
models only
Upgraded
pulse output
models and
analog output
models only
189
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
Advanced Function Setting Level
Parameter
Parameter initialize
No. 1 display:
Characters
init
No. 2 display:
Default
off
Number of multi-SP uses
eU-m
0
Event input allocation
eU
none
Multi-SP used
mspu
off
off: Multi-SP disabled
on: Multi-SP enabled
SP ramp set value
sprt
0
1 to 9999
0: SP ramp function disabled
Standby sequence reset
method
rest
a
Alarm 1 open in alarm
al1n
n-o
Alarm 1 hysteresis
alh1
0.2
a: Condition A
b: Condition B
n-o: Excitation
n-c: Hysteresis
0.1 to 999.9
Alarm 2 open in alarm
al2n
n-o
n-o: Excitation
n-c: Hysteresis
Alarm 2 hysteresis
Alarm 3 open in alarm
al2h
al3n
0.2
n-o
0.1 to 999.9
n-o: Excitation
n-c: Hysteresis
Alarm 3 hysteresis
HBA used
al3h
hbu
0.2
on
0.1 to 999.9
off: Not used
on: Used
(pulse output models only)
Heater burnout latch
hbl
off
off: Disabled
on: Enabled
(pulse output models only)
Heater burnout hysteresis
α
hbh
alfa
0.1
0.65
0.1 to 50.0 (pulse output models only)
0.00 to 1.00
MV upper limit
ol-h
105.0
MV lower limit
ol-l
-5.0
Standard control: Operation lower limit +0.1
to 105.0
Heating and cooling control:0.0 to 105.0
Standard control: −5.0 to operation limit −0.1
Heating and cooling control: −105.0 to 0
Input digital filter
Additional PV display
inf
pUad
0.0
off
Additional temperature input
shift value display
Temperature input shift type
isdp
off
istp
0
Alarm 1 latch
a1lt
off
Alarm 2 latch
a2lt
off
Alarm 3 latch
a3lt
off
190
Set (monitor) value
on: All parameters initialized
off: Returns to after
off initializing
0: No multi-SP uses
1: Switch between SP0 and SP1
none: Disabled
stop: RUN/STOP
0.0 to 999.9
off: Not added
on: Added
off: Not displayed
on: Displayed
0: One-point temperature input shift
1: Two-point temperature input shift
(upgraded pulse output models and analog
output models only)
off: Disabled
on: Enabled
off: Disabled
on: Enabled
off: Disabled
on: Enabled
Appendix B
Sensor Input Setting Ranges/Control Ranges
Parameter
Input error output
Cold junction compensation
method
No. 1 display:
Characters
sero
No. 2 display:
Default
off
cjc
on
Set (monitor) value
off: Sensor error alarm output disabled
on: Sensor error alarm output enabled
(analog output models only)
off: External, on: Internal
Communications Setting Level
Parameter
No. 1 display:
Characters
Communications data length len
No. 2 display:
Default
Set (monitor) value
7
7: 7, 8: 8
Communications stop bit
Communications parity
sbit
prty
2
eUen
1:1 bit, 2: 2 bits
none: None, eUen: Even, odd: Odd
Communications response
wait time
sdwt
20
0 to 9999
191
Appendix C
ASCII Table
Upper
Lower
0
0
NUL
1
2
1
DLE
2
SPACE
3
0
@
4
P
5
‘
6
p
7
SOH
STX
DC1
DC2
!
“
1
2
A
B
Q
R
a
b
q
r
3
4
ETX
EOT
DC3
DC4
#
$
3
4
C
D
S
T
c
d
s
t
5
6
ENQ
ACK
NAK
SYN
%
&
5
6
E
F
U
V
e
f
u
v
7
8
BEL
BS
ETB
CAN
‘
(
7
8
G
H
W
X
g
h
w
x
9
A
HT
LF
EM
SUB
)
*
9
:
I
J
Y
Z
i
j
y
z
B
C
VT
FF
ESC
FS
+
,
;
<
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
D
E
CR
SO
GS
RS
.
=
>
M
N
]
^
m
n
}
~
F
SI
US
/
?
O
_
o
DEL
193
Index
Symbols
°C/°F, 23
°C/°F selection, 144
AT execute/stop, 81
auto/manual, 56, 71
automatic mode, 56
autotuning, 31
auxiliary output, 27
Numerics
1-point shif, 42
2-PID control, 24
2-point temperature input shift, 45
3-position control, 29
auxiliary output 1 allocation, 148–149
auxiliary output 2 allocation, 149–150
auxiliary outputs, 15
B
baud rate, 3
A
α, 160
additional PV display, 162
BCC, 65–66
C
additional temperature input shift value display, 162
calculating the detection current value, 37
address, 68
characteristics, 182
adjustment level, 115
cold junction compensation method, 164
advanced function setting level, 115
command frame, 65
alarm 1 hysteresis, 158
communications data length, 166
alarm 1 latch, 163
communications parity, 166
alarm 1 open in alarm, 157
communications procedure, 64
alarm 1 type, 147
communications response wait time, 167
alarm 2 hysteresis, 158
alarm 2 latch, 163
alarm 2 open in alarm, 157
alarm 2 type, 147
alarm 3 hysteresis, 158
alarm 3 latch, 163
alarm 3 open in alarm, 157
alarm 3 type, 147
alarm hysteresis, 46
alarm latch, 46
alarm lower limit alarm value 2, 133
alarm lower limit value 1, 132
alarm type, 33
alarm upper limit alarm value 2, 133
alarm upper limit value 1, 132
alarm value, 33, 35
alarm value 1, 131
alarm value 2, 131
alarm value 3, 131
ASCII table, 193
AT execute/cancel, 71, 135
communications setting level, 115
communications stop bit, 166
communications writing, 54, 71, 80, 135
CompoWay/F, 5, 64
connector cover, 9
control output, 15
control output 1 allocation, 147
control output 2 allocation, 148
control period, 25
control start, 50
control stop, 50
cooling coefficient, 49, 140
cooling control output, 26–27
cooling control period, 25, 146
copy mode, 114, 118
CT, 16
current transformer (CT), 36, 183
D
dead band, 29, 49, 141
195
Index
decimal point, 48, 144
input type, 22, 143
derivative time, 32, 139
integral time, 32, 139
DIN track, 11
direct operation, 25
direct/reverse operation, 146
download, 118
L
levels, 114
list of parameters, 122
E
echoback test, 67, 89
lower limit alarm, 33
lower limit temperature input shift value, 42, 44, 138
lower limit values, 35
end code, 66
end plates, 10
ETX, 65–66
M
event input, 5, 16, 50
manual mode, 56
event input allocation, 50, 154
manual reset value, 141
external dimensions, 8
manual setup, 32
move to protect level, 71, 84
F
move to setting area 1, 71, 84
MRC, 67
FINS, 64
MRES, 67
FINS-mini command text, 65
multiple reads of monitor values/setting data, 76
FINS-mini response tex, 66
multiple writes of setting data, 79
frame, 65
multi-SP, 50, 71, 81, 130
front panel, 111
multi-SP use, 50, 155
MV lower limit, 160
H
HBA, 181
MV monitor for cooling, 134
MV monitor for heating, 133
MV upper limit, 160
HBA used, 159
heater burnout, 36
heater burnout alarm, 16, 36, 47
N
heater burnout detection, 36
no. of multi-SP uses, 50, 154
heater burnout hysteresis, 159
node no., 65–66
heater burnout latch, 159
heater current monitor, 36
heater current value monitor, 130, 135
O
heating and cooling control, 29, 49
ON/OFF control, 24, 29
heating control period, 146
one-point shift, 43
hysteresis, 29
open in alarm, 47
operation after power ON, 150
I
operation after turning ON the power supply, 38
operation commands, 67, 71
initial setting level, 115
operation display, 3
initial setting/communications protection, 54, 128
operation level, 115
input digital filter, 161
operation/adjustment protection, 54, 128
196
Index
output allocations, 26
SP 0, 137
SP 1, 137
P
parameter initialize, 72, 86, 154
SP during SP ramp, 53
SP limits, 52
SP lower limit, 145
PID constants, 31
SP ramp, 53
PID parameters, 32
SP ramp set value, 53, 155
PID/OnOff, 145
SP upper limit, 145
power supply, 14
SRC, 67
proportional band, 32, 139
SRES, 67
protect level, 77, 115
standby sequence, 46
PV, 129
standby sequence reset method, 156
PV hold, 58, 72, 85
starting control, 38
PV hold value, 58
stopping control, 38
PV/SP, 129
STX, 65–66
sub-address, 65–66
R
RAM data save, 71, 83
T
ramp SP value monitor, 130
temperature input shift, 137
ratings, 181
terminal arrangement, 13
read controller attribute, 67, 87
terminator, 18
read controller status, 67, 88
twisted-pair cable, 17
read from multiple variable area, 67
two-point shift, 44
read from variable area, 67, 69
read monitor value, 74
read setting data, 75
U
response frame, 66
unit number, 3
reverse operation, 25
upload, 118
RUN/STOP, 38, 71, 131
upper limit alarm, 33
upper limit temperature input shift value, 42, 44, 138
S
upper limit values, 35
using the keys, 112
scaling, 48
scaling lower limit, 48, 144
scaling upper limit, 48, 144
V
sensor input setting ranges/control ranges, 185
variable area, 68
setting change protection, 55, 128
variable area map, 90
setting display unit, 18, 108, 182
variable type, 68
setting switches, 3
shifting input, 42
SID, 65
W
side connector, 8
wiring, 14
software reset, 71, 83
write mode, 82
solderless terminals, 13
write protect level setting data, 77
197
Index
write setting data, 78
write to multiple variable area, 67
write to variable area, 67, 70
198
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as suffix to catalog number on front cover of manual.
Cat. No. H113-E1-03B
Revision code
The following table outlines changes made to manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to previous
version.
Revision code
1
02
Date
Revised content
January 2001 Original production
June 2002
Page xi: Added paragraph at beginning to indicate model name abbreviations.
Page xv: Added paragraph to first precautionary item on forced cooling.
Page 3: Added note at end of 1-1-3 Display.
Page 4: Replaced configuration graphic and added note.
Page 5: Corrected one paragraph under Control Output and another under HBA.
Page 13: Replaced graphic under Terminal Arrangement.
Page 14: Added graphic and paragraph to Power Supply and Inputs.
Page 15: Added graphics, replaced top terminal arrangement graphic, corrected table,
and added note to table under Control Output 1/2, Auxiliary Output 1/2, and CT Inputs.
Page 16: Added Linear Voltage Output, added graphics, and replace bottom graphic.
Page 17, 102, and 109: Replaced graphics.
Page 18: Added paragraph on forced cooling at end of 2-3-1.
Page 22: Added note to table.
Page 26: Changed tables under 3-4-3 and added setting examples.
Page 28: Added graphic to Hysteresis.
Page 40: Corrected first paragraph under 4-1-1, changed descriptions under Two-point
Shift.
Page 41: Deleted paragraph at end of 4-1-2.
Pages 42 and 43: Replaced equations.
Page 44: Added an item to 4-2-2.
Page 47: Added graphic to Cooling Coefficient.
Page 55: Updated two tables under 4-9-2.
Page 58: Added new section 4-12.
Page 60: Added note under 5-1-3.
Page 64: Replaced 2nd and 3rd graphics.
Page 67: Changed bottom table and added note.
Pages 71, 72, 74, and 75: Corrected addresses for variable type C3.
Pages 76, 77, and 81: Changed command tables.
Page 82: Added new section 5-9-19 and changed response table.
Pages 85 and 87 through 95: Changed tables.
Pages 98 and 99: Added new section 6-1-2, replaced graphics, and deleted 6-1-3.
Page 100: Corrected descriptions under Operation Indicators.
Pages 107 and 108: Completely changed descriptions under 6-5 and 6-6.
Pages 121, 122, 123, and 124: Changed descriptions under Condition.
Pages 133 and 134: Changed tables under Settings and added 7-5-13 to 7-5-18.
Pages 140 and 143: Changed descriptions under Condition.
Page143: Added new section 7-6-17.
Page 144: Added new section 7-6-19.
Page 152: Added few rows to Settings in top table.
Page 154: Added one row to Settings in table.
Page 156: Added new sections 8-7 and 8-8 (moved from Appendix B)
Pages 157 and 158: Corrected tables and notes.
Page 164: Added List of E5ZN-SDL Settings under new Appendix B.
199
Revision code
03
03A
03B
200
Date
September 2002
October 2004
November 2005
Revised content
Pages xi, 14, 42, 46, 72, 80, 81, 85, 86, 90, 91, 104, 105, 138, 153, 162, 189, and 190:
Added or revised information for upgraded pulse output models.
Page14: Added an alternative model to Recommended power supply.
Page 143: Corrected the analog input from “0 to 5 mV” to “0 to 50 mV” in the name column.
Page 182: Added information to table and accompanying notes.
Page 44: Equations 1 and 2 modified.
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Analog Controller Division
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7080/Fax: (81)75-344-7189
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
239920 Singapore
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Road (M),
Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. H113-E1-03B
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice
Printed in Japan
1105 (0101)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement